JP6866780B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a certain path from the vertically upper side to the vertically lower side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying the movement of a gaming ball flowing down a gaming area and improving the player's attention to the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine including a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on the front surface of the gaming board and a ball entering means for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. The ball-entry means includes a first winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and a second winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. The machine puts a game ball in the first winning opening, a first ball-possible state in which the game ball is not inserted in the second winning opening, and a game ball in the second winning opening. At the same time, the second winning state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the first winning opening and the inaccessible state in which the gaming ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning opening or the second winning opening. Switching, a ball-entry state switching means provided between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is provided, and the ball-filling state switching means is played in either the first winning opening or the second winning opening. A switching derivative composed of at least one member for guiding the sphere and a switching derivative driving unit for integrally driving the switching derivative are provided, and the switching derivative driving unit drives the switching derivative to play a game in the first winning opening. It is characterized by switching to a first ball-entry state in which a ball is inserted or a second ball-entry state in which a game ball is inserted into a second winning opening.

According to the present invention, the movement of a game ball flowing down a game area can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Front view of the game board Front view of variable winning device Perspective view of variable winning device Three views of the variable winning device A perspective view showing a detailed configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge. Perspective view of the variable winning device with the first bridge protruding Three views of the variable winning device with the first bridge protruding A perspective view showing a detailed configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state where the first bridge is projected. Perspective view of the variable winning device with the second bridge protruding Three views of the variable winning device with the second bridge protruding A perspective view showing a detailed configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state where the second bridge is projected. Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery A diagram showing a winning / failing table that stores the values of random numbers that win the jackpot. The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of a jackpot type The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process Diagram showing the flowchart of the main process The figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control process The figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the prize ball determination process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing Diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device at the time of shifting to the open / close execution mode. A perspective view showing a detailed configuration of a modified example of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state where the first bridge is projected. A perspective view showing a detailed configuration of a modified example of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state where the first bridge is projected. It is a front view of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of a jackpot type The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of V prize detection processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device at the time of shifting to the open / close execution mode. Front view of the game board according to the third embodiment of the present invention. Front view of the game board with an enlarged vicinity of the first winning opening and the second winning opening Schematic diagram showing the front of the first winning opening and the second winning opening in a state where the first bridge is recessed. Schematic diagram showing the front of the first winning opening and the second winning opening in a state where the second bridge is recessed. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing Front view of the game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Front view of variable winning device Three views of the variable winning device Enlarged front view showing a variable winning device when the rotating bridge is in the protruding state Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the round prize ball determination process The figure which shows the flowchart of bridge rotation processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device at the time of shifting to the open / close execution mode. Enlarged front view showing a variable winning device when the rotating bridge is in a state where the ball cannot be entered. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device and the modification of the variable winning device at the time of shifting to the open / close execution mode. Front view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. Front view of variable winning device The figure which shows the detailed structure of the variable winning device in the state which moved the moving bridge to the left side. The figure which shows the detailed structure of the variable winning device in the state which moved the moving bridge to the right side. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process Front view of the variable winning device according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the detailed structure of the variable winning apparatus The figure which shows the detailed structure of the variable winning device in the state which moved the moving bridge to the left side. The figure which shows the detailed structure of the variable winning device in the state which moved the moving bridge to the right side. Front view of the game board according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. Front view of variable winning device Front view showing the detailed configuration of the variable winning device The figure which shows the detailed structure of the variable winning device in the state which the elevating bridge is rotated. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process Front view of the game board according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. Front view of variable winning device The figure which shows the detailed structure of the variable winning apparatus The figure which shows the detailed structure of the variable winning device with the upper bridge protruding. The figure which shows the detailed structure of the variable winning device with the lower bridge protruding. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the front (front side). It has 12 and.

The gaming machine main body 12 is arranged in front of an inner frame (not shown) supported by an outer frame 11 so that one of the left and right side portions can be rotated as a support side, and both left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so that one of the portions can be rotated forward with one of the portions as the support side, and the front door frame 13 is arranged behind the inner frame. It is equipped with a back pack unit (not shown) that is supported by an inner frame so that it can rotate to.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and also has a function of locking the front door frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 14 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made colorless and transparent by glass, but may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin or the like.
Further, the front door frame 13 has a display lamp unit 23 provided above the window unit 21 as a part of light emitting means composed of various lamp units provided around the window unit 21, and a display lamp unit. A speaker unit 24 provided on both the left and right sides of the 23 and outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21 are provided. There is.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side on the upper and lower sides, and are provided so as to bulge forward together.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 14) provided in the back pack unit, and moves to the game ball launch mechanism 81 (see FIG. 14) side while arranging them in a row. It has a function to guide.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 includes a firing handle 27 as a launching means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. The launch handle 27 launches a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward the game area provided above the inner frame by being operated by the player of the pachinko machine 10. To do. The firing handle 27 changes the firing intensity of the gaming ball to be launched toward the gaming area, that is, the firing momentum, by changing the amount of rotation operation thereof.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on the inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In this game area, substantially the entire area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27. Guide the played game ball to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the upper center of the game area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the launch handle 27 by the player increases. It shifts to the side of the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing in the game area. Further, the game board 31 has an upper operating port 36, a lower operating port 37, a variable winning device 5, and an out opening 39 provided in each opening. Further, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided in the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 31 has various members (accessories) such as a large number of nails 44 planted in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game ball in the game area.

Each of the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 5 includes detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 14) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and these detection sensors 40a to 40a to 40d is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the upper operating port 36 includes a detection sensor 40a, the lower operating port 37 includes a detection sensor 40b, and the variable winning device 5 includes detection sensors 40c and 40d. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when the ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when the ball enters the lower operating port 37. When a ball is entered into the variable winning device 5, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 or 15 prize balls. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls at the operating ports 36 and 37 may be different.

The out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings and the like are discharged from the game area through the out openings 39. Further, the out port 39 includes a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 14) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the out ports 39, unlike the cases where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 14) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the through gates 41, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is discharged not only from the game area after passing through the opening but also from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area is continued without flow. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 39, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 means that after passing through a gate provided in the game area, the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

The upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 31. Each of the actuating ports 36 and 37 opens upward together so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged above and the lower operating port 37 is arranged below. It is installed side by side in the vertical direction. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operating port 37 is closed by bringing the upper ends of the electric accessory 37a close to each other in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower operating port 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operating port 36 is narrower than that of one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operating port 36 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and may win the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. it can.

In addition, in the electric accessory 37a, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state) and a lower state. The operating port 37 may be configured to switch from a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize. Further, the lower operating port 37 may be configured such that such switching is performed not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by the displacement of the lower operating port 37. In the case of such a configuration, the lower operating port 37 may be configured. 37 does not have to be provided with the electric accessory 37a.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the variable winning device. In FIG. 3, the vertically upward direction is defined as the + Z axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to the Z axis are described as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
As shown in FIG. 3, the variable winning device 5 is provided below the lower operating port 37. The variable winning device 5 includes a first winning opening 51 provided on the left side of the game area and a second winning opening 52 provided on the right side of the game area.
The player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 5 by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.

Here, the game board 31 includes a panel 53 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 5. The panel 53 is formed to be transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 5 can be visually recognized from the front side.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 5 from the front through the panel 53.

FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the variable winning device. FIG. 5 is a three-view view of the variable winning device. Specifically, FIG. 4 is a view of the front surface of the variable winning device 5 as viewed from the diagonally upper right side. 5 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5 as viewed from the upper surface side, FIG. 5 (B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5, and FIG. 5 (C) is a right side surface. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 5 seen from the side.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the first winning opening 51 is provided in the opening 311 formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The first winning opening 51 is provided so as to open to the right, and the substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 511 that guides the game ball entered through the opening to the opening 311 and the inside of the cover 511. In addition to being provided, it also includes the above-mentioned detection sensor 40c that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
The game ball that is guided by the cover 511 and enters the opening 311 is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 311a. The game ball passing through the discharge passage 311a joins the game ball discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a of the out port 39 (see FIG. 5C).

The second winning opening 52 is provided in the opening 312 formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The second winning opening 52 is provided so as to open to the left, and inside the cover 521 and the cover 521 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that guides the game ball entered through the opening to the opening 312. In addition to being provided, the above-mentioned detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball is provided. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
The game ball that is guided by the cover 521 and enters the opening 312 is discharged from the game area via the discharge passage 312a. The game ball passing through the discharge passage 312a joins the game ball discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a of the out port 39 in the same manner as the game ball passing through the discharge passage 311a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first prize opening 51 functions as a small prize ball winning opening for paying out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of the prize balls when the game ball is entered. The second winning opening 52 functions as a multi-prize ball winning opening for paying out a larger number (15 in this embodiment) of the winning holes than the first winning opening 51 when the game ball is entered.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 51 is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction (+ X-axis direction side). The second winning opening 52 is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction (-X-axis direction side).
Further, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 function as a ball-entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area.

Further, the first winning opening 51 includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped first bridge 512 provided on the right side of the cover 511, a U-shaped arm 513 attached to the back side of the first bridge 512, and the like. It includes a first bridge drive unit 514 that drives the first bridge 512 via the arm 513.
The first bridge 512 is provided so as to be retractable through a hole 313 having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31, and is provided so as to be inclined from the lower end portion of the cover 511 to the upper end portion of the cover 521. Has been done.
The arm 513 is provided so as to connect the back surface portion of the first bridge 512 and the shaft body of the first bridge drive portion 514.

The second winning opening 52 includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped second bridge 522 provided on the left side of the cover 521, a U-shaped arm 523 attached to the back side of the second bridge 522, and an arm 523. It is provided with a second bridge driving unit 524 that drives the second bridge 522 via the above.
The second bridge 522 is provided so as to be retractable through a hole 314 having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31, and is provided so as to be inclined from the lower end portion of the cover 521 to the upper end portion of the cover 511. Has been done.
The arm 523 is provided so as to connect the back surface portion of the second bridge 522 and the shaft body of the second bridge drive portion 524.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first bridge 512 is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board 31, and is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51 side, and the second bridge is second. The bridge 522 is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board 31, and is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52 side.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first bridge drive unit 514 and the second bridge drive unit 524 function as a bridge drive unit that causes the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 to sink into the game board 31. doing. In other words, the first bridge drive unit 514 and the second bridge drive unit 524 function as derivative drive units that independently drive the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to intersect each other.

FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a detailed configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge.
As shown in FIG. 6, the first bridge 512 includes a flat plate portion 5121 located on the cover 511 side (-X-axis direction side), a flat plate portion 5122 located on the cover 521 side (+ X-axis direction side), and a flat plate. It has a connecting portion 5123 for connecting the portion 5121 and the flat plate portion 5122.
The connecting portion 5123 is located on the front side of the first bridge 512, and is formed so as to have a width narrower than that of the flat plate portion 5121 and the flat plate portion 5122. In other words, the first bridge 512 has a slit 5124 formed in the central portion thereof and formed along the sinking direction from the back surface side to the front surface side.

The second bridge 522 includes a flat plate portion 5221 located on the cover 521 side (+ X-axis direction side), a flat plate portion 5222 located on the cover 511 side (-X-axis direction side), and a flat plate portion 5221 and a flat plate portion 5222. It has a connecting portion 5223 to be connected.
The connecting portion 5223 is located on the back surface side of the second bridge 522, and is formed so as to have a width narrower than that of the flat plate portion 5221 and the flat plate portion 5222. In other words, the second bridge 522 has a slit 5224 formed in the central portion thereof and formed along the sinking direction from the front side to the back side.

Then, the slit 5124 of the first bridge 512 and the slit 5224 of the second bridge 522 are meshed with each other along the recessing direction (Y-axis direction) of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522. There is.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 have the slit 5124 of the first bridge 512 and the slit 5224 of the second bridge 522 as the first bridge 512 and the second bridge. The bridges 522 are provided so as to intersect by engaging with each other along the sinking direction of the bridge 522.

FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the variable winning device in a state where the first bridge is projected. FIG. 8 is a three-view view of the variable winning device in a state where the first bridge is projected. FIG. 9 is a perspective view showing a detailed configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state where the first bridge is projected. Specifically, FIG. 7 is a view of the front surface of the variable winning device 5 as viewed from the diagonally upper right side. 8 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5 as viewed from the upper surface side, FIG. 8 (B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5, and FIG. 8 (C) is a right side surface. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 5 seen from the side.
7 to 9 are views showing the variable winning device 5 in a state where only the first bridge 512 is projected.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the first bridge drive unit 514 causes the first bridge 512 to pass through the hole 313 formed in the game board 31 by projecting the shaft body toward the window panel 22. (See the arrows in FIGS. 8 and 9). Since the first bridge 512 is provided so as to incline from the lower end of the cover 511 to the upper end of the cover 521, the first bridge 512 flows down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 by projecting from the game board 31. The game ball to be played can be guided to the opening of the cover 511 (see the arrow in FIG. 8).

Here, the protrusion width D1 of the first bridge 512 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the distance D2 between the game board 31 and the panel 53. In other words, the protrusion width D1 from the game board 31 of the first bridge 512 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball.
In the present embodiment, the protrusion width D1 of the first bridge 512 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. It may be set to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

The opening width of the cover 511 is set to become narrower from the entrance side (right side) to the back side (left side). According to this, the cover 511 can smoothly win the game ball guided along the inclination of the first bridge 512 to the first winning opening 51.
The upper surface portion of the cover 511 has a shape protruding toward the cover 521 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 511.

Further, the first bridge drive unit 514 immerses the first bridge 512 in the game board 31 through the hole 313 formed in the game board 31 by immersing the shaft body toward the window panel 22. The first bridge 512 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the out port 39 by immersing it in the game board 31.

In this way, the first winning opening 51 is in an open state in which the first bridge 512 is projected from the game board 31 to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511, and the first bridge 512 is immersed in the game board 31. It has a closed state in which the game ball is guided to the out port 39.
Then, the first bridge drive unit 514 sets the first winning opening 51 to either the open state or the closed state by driving the first bridge 512.

In other words, the first bridge 512 functions as a first derivative that guides the game ball to the first winning opening 51.
Then, the first bridge drive unit 514 sets the first bridge 512 to be valid (open state) by projecting the first bridge 512 with respect to the game board 31, and plays the first bridge 512. The first bridge 512 is disabled (closed) by immersing it in the board 31.

As described above, the protrusion width D1 of the first bridge 512 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, and therefore, for example, is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. The first bridge 512 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31 as compared to the case where it is.
According to this, the first bridge drive unit 514 receives the first winning opening 51 at the first bridge 512 immediately after setting the first winning opening 51 in the closed state and immediately before setting the first winning opening 51 in the closed state. It is possible to suppress over-winning, which causes the game ball led to the opening of the cover 511 to win the first winning opening 51.

Further, as described above, since the upper surface portion of the cover 511 has a shape protruding toward the cover 521 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 511, the first winning opening 51 is set to the closed state. In this case, the game ball is erroneously inserted into the first winning opening 51 as compared with the case where the upper surface portion of the cover 511 does not protrude toward the cover 521 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 511. It becomes difficult to win a prize.
In the present embodiment, the upper surface portion of the cover 511 has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 521 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 511, but may have a shape that does not protrude.

FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the variable winning device in a state where the second bridge is projected. FIG. 11 is a three-view view of the variable winning device in a state where the second bridge is projected. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing a detailed configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state where the second bridge is projected. Specifically, FIG. 10 is a view of the front surface of the variable winning device 5 viewed from an obliquely upper right side. 11 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5 as viewed from the upper surface side, FIG. 11 (B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5, and FIG. 11 (C) is a right side surface. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 5 seen from the side.
10 to 12 are views showing the variable winning device 5 in a state where only the second bridge 522 is projected.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the second bridge drive unit 524 causes the second bridge 522 to pass through the hole 314 formed in the game board 31 by projecting the shaft body toward the window panel 22. (See the arrows in FIGS. 11 and 12). Since the second bridge 522 is provided so as to incline from the lower end of the cover 521 to the upper end of the cover 511, the second bridge 522 flows down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 by projecting from the game board 31. The game ball to be played can be guided to the opening of the cover 521 (see the arrow in FIG. 11).

Here, the protrusion width D1 of the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the distance D2 between the game board 31 and the panel 53. In other words, the protrusion width D1 of the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball.
In the present embodiment, the protrusion width D1 of the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. It may be set to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

The opening width of the cover 521 is set to become narrower from the entrance side (left side) to the back side (right side). According to this, the cover 521 can smoothly win the game ball guided along the inclination of the first bridge 522 to the second winning opening 52.
The upper surface portion of the cover 521 has a shape protruding toward the cover 511 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 521.

Further, the second bridge drive unit 524 immerses the second bridge 522 into the game board 31 through the hole 314 formed in the game board 31 by immersing the shaft body toward the window panel 22. The second bridge 522 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the out port 39 by immersing it in the game board 31.

In this way, the second winning opening 52 is in an open state in which the second bridge 522 is projected from the game board 31 to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 521, and the second bridge 522 is immersed in the game board 31. It has a closed state in which the game ball is guided to the out port 39.
Then, the second bridge drive unit 524 sets the second winning opening 52 to either the open state or the closed state by driving the second bridge 522.

In other words, the second bridge 522 functions as a second derivative that guides the game ball to the second winning opening 52.
Then, the second bridge drive unit 524 sets the second bridge 522 to be valid (open state) by projecting the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31, and plays the second bridge 522. The second bridge 522 is disabled (closed) by immersing it in the board 31.

As described above, the protrusion width D1 of the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, and therefore, for example, is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. The second bridge 522 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31 as compared to the case where it is.
According to this, the second bridge drive unit 524 receives the second winning opening 52 at the second bridge 522 immediately after setting the second winning opening 52 in the closed state and immediately before setting the second winning opening 52 in the closed state. It is possible to suppress over-winning, which causes the game ball leading to the opening of the cover 521 to be won.

Further, as described above, since the upper surface portion of the cover 521 has a shape protruding toward the cover 511 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 521, the second winning opening 52 is set to the closed state. In this case, the game ball is erroneously inserted into the second winning opening 52 as compared with the case where the upper surface portion of the cover 521 does not protrude toward the cover 511 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 521. It becomes difficult to win a prize.
In the present embodiment, the upper surface portion of the cover 521 has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 511 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 521, but the shape may not protrude.

Here, the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 are usually set in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52 is set to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. To.
In the open / close execution mode (specific control state), the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52 is set to the open state, and the game ball is placed in the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52. A mode that allows you to enter the ball. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, after the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52 is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, it is referred to as one round game.

In the following description, the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 are also simply referred to as the large winning opening 50.

Returning to the description of the game board 31, the configuration of the main display device 42 and the like will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2, the main display device 42 includes a main display unit 45 and a display unit 46 for accessories, and has a segment display unit (not shown) in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. , A plurality of display devices such as a dot display are arranged and configured.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than that of one game ball. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

The main display unit 45 is a first result display unit 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, and the inside performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. A second result display unit 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 14). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is set (or the open / close execution mode is set). ..

The first result display unit 45a executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 36, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 37, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 function as starting ball entry means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. To do.

The accessory display unit 46 executes a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in each through gate 41, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in each through gate 41. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric service open state. In this electric service open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operating port 37 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are composed of a segment display, a dot display, and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic display unit are organic. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as an EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

The symbol display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, the symbol display device 47 may execute the variation display. The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 47 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 47, and a second holding lamp portion 49b. It is provided with a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the area on the right side of the holding lamp portion 49b.

The first holding lamp unit 49a is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the upper operating port 36, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The first holding lamp unit 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second holding lamp unit 49b is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the lower operating port 37, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The second holding lamp unit 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third holding lamp unit 49c is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The third holding lamp unit 49c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
The holding lamp units 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 47.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 13, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three rows of display areas, and the left symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the right symbol are in each display area in this order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, eight types of symbols consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "1" is next to "8". It is composed of. In FIG. 13, the center line of each display area is indicated by a alternate long and short dash line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for the game round is executed on the display screen G. The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. It ends in the state.
That is, the game times means from the start of the variable display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the winning of each of the operating ports 36 and 37.

The mode of variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 47 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol string, the scrolling direction of each symbol string, the number of symbols of each symbol string, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol of each symbol string may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 14, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game balls, and a power supply that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game balls. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on a back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electric service holding area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 is a first bridge drive unit that retracts the electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 and the first bridge 512 of the variable winning device 5. The 514, the second bridge drive unit 524 that causes the second bridge 522 of the variable winning device 5 to be retracted, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 are connected to each other.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric accessory open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first bridge drive unit 514 and the second bridge drive unit 524 to sink the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts output from the power supply / launch control device 80. .. Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40f are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, various winning ports of the variable winning device 5, the out port 39, and each through gate 41. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f, the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for various winning openings, out openings 39, and through gates 41. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to the player during a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. To do.

The power supply / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the power supply / emission control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 81. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34. The power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch a game ball when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

<Electrical configuration for executing an internal lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 15, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for generating jackpots, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, and draws whether or not to generate reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS to determine the display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 14) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 14) provided as the acquisition information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is stored in the electric service holding area 64c (see FIG. 14) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. Will be done.

The holding ball storage area 64b includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The first result display unit holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4 when the upper operating port 36 is won a prize a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Ra for the first result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the upper operating port 36 are held. Further, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
The number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 is not limited to 4, but may be any other, such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

The second result display unit holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds information in the order of first area Rb1 → second area Rb2 → third area Rb3 → fourth area Rb4 when winning a prize in the lower operating port 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the lower operating port 37 are held. Further, the hold area Rb for the second result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
The number of holdings related to the lower operating port 37 is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, may be 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the result display units 45a and 45b, the execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is an area for moving.

The electric service holding area 64c includes four storage areas like the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. Therefore, up to four winning balls for each through gate 41 are reserved.
The number of reserved pieces related to each through gate 41 is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, may be 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops in the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 250, and then returning to 0. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. To.
Then, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric combination) as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Execute the open lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequency of winning a game ball into the lower operating port 37 is different from each other by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state is relatively low, and a frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. It has a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state is the same (for example, both are 4/5) in the electric accessory open lottery. However, in the high-frequency support mode, as compared with the low-frequency support mode, when the electric accessory 37a is won in the open state, the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state more often, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time for one time is also longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state during each opening in the one-time electric service open state is shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode has a minimum secured time (role) that is secured as the minimum waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of one variable display on the physical display unit 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win the lower operating port 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating opening 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared with the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reservation times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter reservation time can be easily selected as compared with the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selection time is selected. May be configured to be shorter. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high as compared with.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 599, and then returning to 0. .. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a big hit (win / fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a winning / failing table in which the values of random numbers that win the jackpot occurrence are stored.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is determined in the hit / miss table storage area 63a (see FIG. 14) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit / miss information group storage means, as shown in FIG. It is stored as (win / fail information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / losing lottery modes: a low-probability mode (low-probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big hit, and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) in which a big hit is easy to win. .. The hit / fail tables are the hit / miss table for the low probability mode (low probability hit / miss information group) shown in FIG. 16A and the hit / miss table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 16B (high probability hit / miss information). Group) and.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot by comparing these hit / fail tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These winning / failing tables have the results (winning / failing results) of a plurality of jackpot occurrences of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 16A, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is two. Is.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 16B, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is 21. Is. Here, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot winning stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and the high-probability mode may have a higher probability of winning a big hit than the low-probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode. It may also include a part of the random number values that are stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and become the "big hit winning".

In addition, in each winning / losing lottery mode, except for the value of the random number that is the "big hit winning", the big hit is not won and the result is lost.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result (small hit result)" and a "normal deviation result". All of these out-of-order results are common in that they do not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special deviation result" is different in that it does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 29, and then returning to 0. ..
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a distribution table in which the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are stored.
As shown in FIG. 17, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 14) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 17 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 17 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 17A, the first distribution table includes "low probability results (special distribution results corresponding to low probability)" and "unspecified low probability high probability results (low probability high probability results corresponding to small rounds)". ) ”,“ Explicit small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round) ”, and“ most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability) ”are set as the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14" are "unspecified". "Round high-accuracy results" are assigned, "15-19" are assigned to "explicit low-round high-accuracy results", and "20-29" are assigned to "most advantageous results".

The second distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the holding area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 17B, the second distribution table has two distribution results, a “low probability result” and a “most advantageous result”, as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 29" are "most advantageous results". ".

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 5 in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.
The "unspecified small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "most advantageous result" have a high probability of winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The “unspecified small round high accuracy result” is a distribution result in which the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is maintained as it is. Here, if the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.
The "explicit small round high accuracy result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery.

The difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 5 in the opening / closing execution mode of (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 238, and then returning to 0. ..
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 is the value of the reach table and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery. By comparing with and, a lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63c (see FIG. 14) of the ROM 63.

Here, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery is assigned to the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 47 stops the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number of is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, when the result is a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery and the result is "low probability result" in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 47 is a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result. Is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Furthermore, if it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery and is divided into "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or "big hit winning" in the winning / failing lottery. If the result is a "special loss result", the symbol display device 47 is selected when the stop result is not a combination of symbols having the same number but a "normal loss result" in the winning / failing lottery. A combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not displayed is stopped and displayed on the effective line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols having the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery, and it is divided into the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. In the case of), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (“big hit winning” in the winning / failing lottery, and “unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high” in the distribution lottery. It does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the case of being sorted into the "probable result" or the case of "special loss result" without being "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery.

In the reach display mode, a part of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is placed on the effective line L. By displaying the stop, the same combination of symbols is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (for example, symbol sequence Z2) is displayed in a variable manner in that state.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit winner" in the winning / losing lottery after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 by generating the reach display and before displaying the predetermined stop result. It is possible to make the player expect that the result is divided into "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery.

The reach display mode is not limited to this, and after stopping and displaying a part of the symbol strings, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, each symbol string may be reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 47. The expected effect is to make the player expect that the winning / losing lottery will be a "big hit" after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. Refers to the production. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display and the notice display described above.

The notice display will not be a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery if it is a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery, or if it is a "special loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. This is an expected production that makes it easier to generate the production than when the result is "normally out of order". This notice display may make it easier to select an effect having a low appearance rate, or may combine these, instead of making it easier to generate the effect.
The lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display was executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display is executed by the voice emission control device 90. ..

In the mode of the notice display, among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed, and a part of the symbol rows (for example, In a situation where the symbol sequence Z1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L and a plurality of symbol sequences (for example, the symbol columns Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner or a reach display is generated, a predetermined character is displayed. Etc. are displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs in both the case where the reach display is generated and the case where the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done.
The notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the notice display may be displayed by changing the form of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Finally, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 198, and then returning to 0. ..
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once for each execution of the normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 45 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. The display durations will be described in detail later.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for advancing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing, normal processing, main processing, and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes the reading process of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to the various winning openings have detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and this setting is made. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the first winning opening 51 has detected the winning of a game ball, the MPU 62 issues a prize ball command for instructing 10 prize balls. When it is transmitted to the device 70 and it is determined that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the second winning opening 52 has detected the winning of the game ball, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls is issued. It is transmitted to the control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. To do. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 is updated by adding 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively. The latter value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the values of the counters C1 to C4 are returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for thru. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp unit 49c, and transmits the set command to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the third hold lamp unit 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is four, and the third reserved lamp unit 49c is lit by the number corresponding to the reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operating port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the actuation port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40a corresponding to the upper operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether or not the game ball has won the upper operating opening 36 (starting winning). Is determined. When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 36, in step S202, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and holds the holding. The number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the lower operating port 37 wins the game ball. By determining whether or not is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the lower operating port 37.
When it is determined in step S203 that the game ball has not won a prize in the lower operating port 37, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 37, in step S204, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. The reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, in step S205, the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine if it exists.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 updates by adding 1 to the value of the start hold storage number N in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 sets each value set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the hold area for the result display unit. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 62 has each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing. The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set to "3" in step S202, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 62 has the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing. The set of each value of is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. To do. For example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set to "3" in step S204, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is four, and the first holding lamp portion 49a or the second holding lamp portion 49b is the holding number. And the corresponding number of lights.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes an external output process for transmitting the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 issues the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set, and the command for the effect is set. If it is determined that the setting is made, a command for the effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the variable type counter CS by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. .. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the value of the variation type counter CS is returned to 0 to clear the value.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes a winning / failing lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 47, and finally stops and displays the pattern on the main display unit 45. Execute the determination of information related to.
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes the demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game after the end of the game. If it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, when the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, if the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 62 resets the value of the count.

In step S306, the MPU 62 executes an electric service support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operating port 37. In this electric service support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and also performs the electric accessory opening lottery. If it is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes the game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply / launch control device 80 to execute launch control for launching the game ball based on the player rotating the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 in a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). .. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27. Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. When the power failure monitoring board 65 confirms the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal. The power failure flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing after step S312 without executing the processing after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set, whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process is reached in step S309, that is, the current normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal processing has not been reached, that is, when the remaining time occurs, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S310, and step S311 In, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes step S301 again to perform the next time. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401-S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) to be in an operable state for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on. ) Elapses.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402. Further, when it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when it reaches 10,000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission / prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission / prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply / emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the MPU 62 determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. To do.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S405 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 62 calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (processing at the time of power interruption) of normal processing, and if they match, the RAM determination value is compared. , The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 in the power failure processing. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by writing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or the RAM determination value in step S407. If it is determined that is not normal, the processes after step S409 are executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of the power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) in step S411, and interrupts the timer in step S412. Allows the occurrence of processing and shifts to the above-mentioned normal processing.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the control board on the sub side recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed, and executes self-initialization. To do.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game time control process.
In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, that is, the game is in progress. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round progress processing of steps S506 to S509.

First, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and these holding numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 holds the first result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area Ra in step S504. The data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for the digestion of the game times is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start the variation display to execute the variation start process for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG. 23.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S204 of the winning process for the operating port is "0" or less. To do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S602 to S606, and in step S601. When it is determined that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit, which sets the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit for digestion of the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for a second result display unit that sets the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for digestion of game times.
Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the second result display unit does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute the data setting process for. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower action port 37, the MPU 62 moves to the upper action port 36. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially played. Set for multiple digestions.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra4. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. The second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b, which of the main display unit 45, has started the variable display when the game is digested. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, the first result display unit 45a is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Indicates to start.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 49a as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the upper operating port 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Rb1 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 45b is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 when the game round is digested. Indicates to start.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the lower operating port 37 decreases.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the variation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG. 24.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 16A) from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S702. When it is read and the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S701, in step S703, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 16B) is stored from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S704. In this pass / fail determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the pass / fail table read in step S702 or step S703, thereby resulting in a win / fail lottery result (win / fail result). To judge. As described above, the winning / failing result is one of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result", and even if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is a high probability mode. The same is true.

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is "big hit winning". When the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S706, and when it determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". , Step S712 and subsequent processes are executed.

First, in step S705, a process (processing after step S706) when the winning / failing result is determined to be "big hit winning" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. In step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 17A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 In step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 17B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S707 or step S708 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. It is determined according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 has a pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 63 in advance. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 for each distribution result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 identifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is an "unspecified low round high probability result". In that case, the implicit small round high probability result flag is set, and when it is specified that it is the "explicit small round high probability result", the explicit small round high probability result flag is set and the "most advantageous result" is set. If it is specified that is, the most advantageous result flag is set. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S716.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, in step S705, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / failing result is not “big hit winning” (processing after step S712) will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result determined in step S704 is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is a "special miss result", it executes the processes after step S713, and determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is not a "special miss result". Is the process from step S715 onward.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the special deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the special deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in the ROM 63 in advance. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the special deviation result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.
In step S714, the MPU 62 sets the special disengagement flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is the "special miss result" by referring to the special miss flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 normally executes the stop result setting process for the outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

After executing any of the processes of step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 62 executes the display duration (display duration) setting process in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reach display occurs on the symbol display device 47. Specifically, in the MPU 62, when the distribution result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result", and the pass / fail result determined in step S704 is a "normal deviation result". At the same time, if the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display will occur. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the hold ball storage area 64b. Execute a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs, the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The display duration corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 for the variable type counter. The display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of held items increases. Therefore, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 increases. The display duration when the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 is digested is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 37 increases. Further, the display duration table for non-reach is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high frequency support mode than when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table.

The display duration table for non-reach may be set in a relationship opposite to the above-mentioned relationship, such that the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and the support mode. It may be configured so as not to fluctuate. In addition, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the winning / failing result and the sorting result.

In step S717, the MPU 62 sets a variation command and a type command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The variable command contains information related to the display duration. In addition, the variable command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table are mutually exclusive. It's different.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display occurs is not included in the variable command, the reach display is displayed by the voice emission control device 90, which is the control device on the sub side, based on the information related to the display duration. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display occurs. The variable command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

The type command contains information related to the result of success or failure. In other words, the type command includes each information related to the "big hit winning", the "special loss result", and the "normal loss result" as the information related to the win / fail result. In addition, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command has information related to the distribution result, such as "low probability result", "unspecified small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "most advantageous result". Contains information.
In the following description, the winning / failing result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command contains information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first one is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45a starts the variable display, the first result display unit 45a is made to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 is second based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45b starts the variable display, the second result display unit 45b is made to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game time control process, the game time progress process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 is for advancing the game times in steps S506 to S509. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variation end processing in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores information (main) stored in the RAM 64 in any of the processes of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display. Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the amusement park can easily confirm, for example, whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to make the pachinko machine 10 perform the same behavior as when the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done
Further, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol sequence to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the screen G.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets the variable end command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game round based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the production of the game times without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S815 as shown in FIG. 25.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S812.

First, in step S801, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (processes after step S802) will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been completed. When it is determined in step S802 that the variation display of the main display unit 45 has not been completed, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been completed, whether or not the result of winning or failing corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode in step S803. Is determined. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processes after step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the winning / failing result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "normal deviation result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times that the large winning opening 50 of the variable winning device 5 is opened / closed by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be a "big hit winning", the sorting result is determined in step S806. Is a low-round high-accuracy result (“unspecified low-round high-accuracy result” or “explicit low-round high-accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the MPU 62 sets “2” in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S807. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result", the step. In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes in which the end conditions are different from each other. Specifically, as the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a round number regulation mode that shifts when the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" and an opening / closing number that shifts when the winning / failing result is "special loss result". It has a specified mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 50 is executed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning opening 50. Here, the total number of times the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed corresponds to the value set in the open / close counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of times the round game is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 50 once for each round game. In addition, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is met. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 sets the large winning opening 50 to the open state, and then sets the large winning opening 50 to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 reaches the predetermined upper limit.

After executing the process of step S808, the MPU 62 executes the prize ball determination process in step S809.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the prize ball determination process.
In the prize ball determination process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S903 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 executes the prize ball lottery process. In this prize ball lottery process, the MPU 62 sets the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5 to multiple prize balls (15 in this embodiment) based on a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment) or a small prize. A lottery for spheres (10 in this embodiment) is executed.

In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball has been won in the prize ball lottery process of step S901.
When the MPU 62 determines that the multi-prize ball has been won in step S902, the MPU 62 sets the multi-prize ball flag in the RAM 64 in step S903.
This multi-prize ball flag is a flag for specifying that the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5 is a multi-prize ball.
The MPU 62 clears the multi-prize ball flag stored in the RAM 64 at the end of the open / close execution mode. Further, the MPU 62 clears the multi-prize ball flag stored in the RAM 64 when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S902 that the MPU 62 has not won the multi-prize ball (when it is determined that the minor prize ball has been won), the MPU 62 does not set the multi-prize ball flag in the RAM 64. The prize ball determination process is completed.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S810 will be described with reference to FIG. 25.
After executing any of the processes of step S805, step S807, and step S809, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as a waiting time (standby period) for opening in step S810. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the timer counter T is set to the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, the waiting time may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S811, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. In addition, the opening command includes information on whether the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5 is a multi-prize ball or a small prize ball. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S811 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S801, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress (processes after step S812) will be described.
In step S812, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024 as shown in FIG. 27.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the large winning opening 50 is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 50 is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1002.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 50 is open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1006.

First, in step S1001, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 50 is not open (processes after step S1002) will be described.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the timer counter T is set in step S1003. It is determined whether or not the value is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S1004.
Hereinafter, the process of opening the large winning opening in step S1004 will be described in detail.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1109 as shown in FIG. 28.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", in step S1102, "8" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and the step In S1103, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning / failing result is not the "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1104, and the distribution result in step S1105. Is a small round high probability result (“unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high probability result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is a low-round high-accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1106. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1106, the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 whether or not the multi-prize ball flag is set in the RAM 64.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that the multi-prize ball flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the first winning opening in step S1108. In the opening execution process of the first winning opening, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the first bridge driving unit 514 to project the first bridge 512 and open the first winning opening 51. Set. Further, in the opening execution process of the first winning opening, the MPU 62 immerses the second bridge 522 and closes the second winning opening 52 by executing the drive control of the second bridge driving unit 524. Set to.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that the multi-prize ball flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the second winning opening in step S1109. In the opening execution process of the second winning opening, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the second bridge driving unit 524 to project the second bridge 522 and open the second winning opening 52. Set. Further, in the opening execution process of the second winning opening, the MPU 62 immerses the first bridge 512 and closes the first winning opening 51 by executing the drive control of the first bridge driving unit 514. Set to.

After executing the opening execution process of the first winning opening in step S1108 or the opening execution process of the second winning opening in step S1109, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1102 or step S1104 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 defines the upper limit duration from setting the large winning opening 50 to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode (short-term mode). Aspect) and is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 and the firing cycle of the game balls, and therefore is the upper limit of eight game balls. It is easy to get a prize in the large winning opening 50.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 50. Depending on the timing, it is possible to have about one game ball win in the large winning opening 50.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the process after step S1005 will be described with reference to FIG. 27.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S1005 after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S1004. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1005 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the large winning opening 50 has been set to the open state based on the release command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1001, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 50 is open (processes after step S1006) will be described.
In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1103 or step S1106 of the large winning opening opening process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1007.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1018.

First, in step S1006, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be not "0" or less (processing after step S1007) will be described.
In step S1007, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 50. The determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 50 is executed based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40c and 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 50.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that the winning opening 50 has not been won, the MPU 62 ends the opening / closing process of the winning opening.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1007 that the large winning opening 50 has been won, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S1008.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in step S1010. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the first bridge drive unit 514 when the first bridge 512 is projected and the first winning opening 51 is set to the open state. By immersing the first bridge 512 and setting the first winning opening 51 in the closed state. Further, in the closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the second bridge drive unit 524 when the second bridge 522 is projected and the second winning opening 52 is set to the open state. As a result, the second bridge 522 is immersed and the second winning opening 52 is set to the closed state.

In step S1011 the MPU 62 sets the closure command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the large winning opening 50 has been set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1023, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the hit / fail result is not the "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1013.
In step S1013, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is from setting the large winning opening 50 to the open state, setting the large winning opening 50 to the closed state again, and setting the large winning opening 50 to the open state again. The opening standby time is specified. In this embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016.
In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1006, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be “0” or less (processing after step S1018) will be described.
In step S1018, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S1010 described above.
In step S1019, the MPU 62 sets the close command in the same manner as in step S1011 described above.

In step S1020, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
The MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1021 when it is determined in step S1020 that the winning / failing result is not the "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be the "big hit winning".
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1023.

First, in step S1020, a process (processes after step S1021) when the pass / fail result is determined not to be a "special deviation result" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1021, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1022, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Next, in step S1012 or step S1020, a process (processes after step S1023) when the pass / fail result is determined by the MPU 62 to be a “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S1023, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC.

In step S1024, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S813 will be described with reference to FIG. 25.
After executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S812, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening / closing counter SOC value is “0” or less and the round counter RC value is “0” or less in step S813. judge.

When it is determined in step S813 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the value of the timer counter T becomes "0" or less in step S814. It is determined whether or not it is 0 "or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S814 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S814 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the open / close execution mode flag and the multi-prize ball flag stored in the RAM 64 are stored in step S815. After clearing, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1212 as shown in FIG. 29.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1202.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1205.

First, in step S1201, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high probability result” (processes after step S1202) will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 62 clears the number-of-times limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, the high-frequency support mode continues until the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is not set, at least until a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / failing lottery.

In step S1204, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

At the end of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets a flag (low probability result flag, unspecified small round high probability result flag, explicit small round height) set in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result. Clear the probability result flag and the most advantageous result flag) and the special off flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start processing described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64. There is.

Next, in step S1201, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high probability result” (processes after step S1205) will be described.
In step S1205, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is an “unspecified small round high probability result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is an "unspecified small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1206.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not the "unspecified small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1208.

First, in step S1205, a process (processes after step S1206) when the distribution result is determined by the MPU 62 to be an “unspecified small round high probability result” will be described.
In step S1206, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1203 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the high-frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the high-probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1207. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Next, in step S1205, a process (processes after step S1208) when the distribution result is determined by the MPU 62 to be not the “unspecified low round high accuracy result” will be described.
In step S1208, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “low probability result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" (when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "special deviation result"), the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. To do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the distribution result is a "low probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1209.

In step S1209, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues until at least the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit" and the distribution result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1210, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1211, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1212, the MPU 62 sets the number-of-times limit flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game count counter, are played. Continue until the times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the gaming state is the current state. Regardless of the game state, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, if the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, After the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the sorting result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the sorting lottery. The game state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes a "low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is in the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the current game state). After the end of the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is low when 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning or losing lottery. Move to frequency support mode.

In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. It functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode.
Further, the variable winning device 5 is in a state where the game ball can be entered when the opening / closing execution mode is entered.

Further, in the present embodiment, each of the bridges 512 and 522 and each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 allows the game ball to enter the first winning opening 51 and does not allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 52. The first winning state, the second winning state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52, and the game ball is not inserted into the first winning opening 51, and the first winning state. Switching between a non-entry state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter either of the mouth 51 and the second winning opening 52, and a ball-entry state switching provided between the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52. It is functioning as a means.

Specifically, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 makes the first bridge 512 project with respect to the game board 31, and the second bridge 522 immerses the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31. It is switched to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51 via the bridge 512. Each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 passes through the second bridge 522 by projecting the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31 and immersing the first bridge 512 with respect to the game board 31. It is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52. Each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 switches the ball into a non-entry state by immersing the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31.
In other words, each bridge drive unit 514,524 switches between enabling and disabling the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 to enable the first ball, the second ball, and the ball. It is not possible to effectively set both the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 in the first ball-fillable state and the second ball-fillable state by switching the ball-impossible state.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry-possible state by the ball-entry state switching means, and opens / closes. If the mode has not been changed, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the ball entry impossible state.
Specifically, the main control device 60 performs a prize ball determination process (ball entry possible) for selecting either a small prize ball (first ball entry possible state) or a multi-prize ball (second ball entry possible state). (State selection unit) and when a small prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the first ball-entry state, and the prize ball determination process selects a multi-prize ball. If this is the case, the ball entry state switching means is provided with a large winning opening opening process (ball entry enable state switching unit) for switching to the second ball entry enable state.

Here, in the prize ball determination process, a lottery for selecting either a small prize ball or a multi-prize ball is executed based on a predetermined probability (50% in the present embodiment).
In the present embodiment, the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. , Any method may be adopted as long as one of the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state is selected. For example, the ball-entry state selection unit is in the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state according to the type and expectation of the reach display leading to the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. You may choose either one.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 30, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the voice light emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, a speaker unit 24, and a display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 constituting the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90, performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command, and executes control of the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is volatile that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a means of memory.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 47. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display content of the symbol display device 47 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2005, as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes the command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes the effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2004, the MPU 92 executes the demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2005, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process of step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100, and transmits various commands to the display control device 100. When it is determined that the timing of transmission to is reached, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100.
After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG. 32.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2109.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that each command has been received in step S2101, the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability" based on the content of the type command in step S2102. It is determined whether or not it is a "result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 92 executes the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S2103. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and it is determined that the game result is a "low probability result", the same even number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Determine the information related to the combination of symbols to have. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the game result is "in step S2104" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the result is "normally out of order".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not the "normal deviation result", that is, the game result is the "special deviation result", the "unspecified small round high probability result", and the "explicit small round high probability result". In the case of any of the above, in step S2105, a common symbol determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result that is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when a "normally out-of-order result" is obtained in the winning / failing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is a "normal deviation result", the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process for normal deviation in step S2106. In this pattern determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variable command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of the symbols of the reach display as the stop result of finally displaying the stop display on the effective line L. The combination of the reach display symbols is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of the above-mentioned symbols as a stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from any of the combinations of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S2103, step S2105, and step S2106, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S2103, step S2105, and step S2106. Then, the MPU 92 stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These fluctuation start commands and stop result commands are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 creates a data table from the program ROM 103 for executing the display of the start and stop results of the variation display on the symbol display device 47 based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92. read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2108, or when it is determined in step S2101 that the change command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2116.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2109, in step S2110, based on the content of the opening command, the prize ball lottery process in step S901 is a multi-prize ball. Judge whether or not the prize was won.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2110 that the multi-prize ball has not been won, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2113.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the multi-prize ball has been won in step S2110, the MPU 92 executes the determination process of the multi-prize ball notification effect in step S2111. In the determination process of the multi-prize ball notification effect, the MPU 92 determines the execution of the multi-prize ball notification effect that notifies the player that the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5 is the multi-prize ball.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets a multi-prize ball notification command including information related to the multi-prize ball notification effect determined in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the multi-prize ball notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This multi-prize ball notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the multi-prize ball notification effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the multi-prize ball notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the multi-prize ball notification effect.

Specifically, the MPU 92 and the MPU 102 execute the multi-prize ball notification effect during the waiting time (waiting period) for the opening.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 and the MPU 102 execute the multi-prize ball notification effect during the waiting time (waiting period) for the opening, but the multi-prize ball is executed at another timing such as when the round game is executed. The notification effect may be executed.

After executing the process of step S2112, or when it is determined in step S2110 that the multi-prize ball has not been won, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step 2113 based on the content of the opening command. To do.

In step S2114, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2113. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the game result is a "special deviation result" or a "non-explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 92 is used for the open / close execution mode. Select production A as the production. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is an "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 50 is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 50 is executed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selection results of the effects A to D.

In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets a command for the open / close execution mode including information related to the effect for the open / close execution mode selected in step S2114. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open / close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S2115, or when it is determined in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 has the winning / failing results of the “big hit winning” and the “special losing result”, the “unspecified small round high probability result”, and the “explicit” as the game results excluding the “normal loss result”. It has "small round high probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result" distribution result.

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 33, the "special loss result" is a game result selected when the "big hit winning" is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening / closing of the big winning opening 50 is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the winning / failing lottery mode does not shift in the "special loss result".
In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 2 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 50 is executed twice in a short time mode. Will be done. In addition, in the "unspecified small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
As described above, the "special deviation result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" are different in the type of opening / closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 50 is executed twice in a short time mode. doing.

Further, in the "special deviation result" and the "unspecified small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. Furthermore, the support mode does not shift in the "special off result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result". Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is a "special deviation result" or an "unspecified small round high probability result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in an "unspecified small round high probability result" and the mode shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 47 will draw a winning / failing lottery in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The mode is disguised as if it has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 50 is executed twice in a short time mode. To. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 50 is 15 in a long time mode. Executed times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode for the open / close execution mode. The production of is production C or production D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect C, and the combination of symbols having the same stop result is an even number. If, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect D.
Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "best result" and "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, the player has the game result as the "most advantageous result" when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect C. Can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode, so that the game result is the "most advantageous result". And it is not possible to know whether it is a "low probability result".

Then, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not.

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating that it is in the high probability mode on the display screen G, and in the high frequency support mode, the game times are completed as the reference number of times (specifically, 100). When the number of times is reached, an image notifying the transition to the low frequency support mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, even if the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 finally produces the effect for the open / close execution mode in the game round after the end of the open / close execution mode. If so, disguise as if the game result was a "low probability result".

Then, when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 47 is in the high probability mode after 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 releases the camouflage that was applied as if the game result was a "low probability result".

<About the flow when shifting to the open / close execution mode>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device and a variable winning device when the open / close execution mode is entered. Note that FIG. 34 is a simplified diagram of the variable winning device 5 below the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 34 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode. FIGS. 34 (B) and 34 (C) are diagrams showing a flow when the multi-prize ball is not won in the prize ball lottery process of step S901 (when the small prize ball is won). FIGS. 34 (D) and 34 (E) are diagrams showing a flow when a multi-prize ball is won in the prize ball lottery process of step S901.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 34 (A). In the example of FIG. 34, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "best result".

If the MPU 102 receives the open / close execution mode command without receiving the multi-prize ball notification command, it means that the multi-prize ball was not won in the prize ball lottery process in step S901. The symbol display device 47 is made to execute the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the control device 90.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced and displayed, and the symbol display device 47 is displayed. The characters "BONUS!" Are displayed in the center of the screen G. As a result, the MPU 102 suggests to the player that the multi-prize ball was not won in the prize ball lottery process of step S901.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (C), the MPU 102 displays a character (for example, "ROUND1") indicating the number of times the round game is executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and starts the round game. ..
Further, the MPU 62 projects the first bridge 512 and sets the first winning opening 51 in the open state by executing the drive control of the first bridge drive unit 514. Thereby, the MPU 62 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 511.

On the other hand, when the MPU 102 receives the multi-prize ball notification command, it means that the multi-prize ball has been won in the prize ball lottery process in step S901. To execute.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (D), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced and displayed, and the symbol display device 47 is displayed. The characters "Extra BONUS !!" are displayed in the center of the screen G. As a result, the MPU 102 suggests to the player that the multi-prize ball has been won in the prize ball lottery process of step S901.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (E), the MPU 102 displays a character (for example, "ROUND1") indicating the number of times the round game is executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and starts the round game. ..
Further, the MPU 62 projects the second bridge 522 and sets the second winning opening 52 in the open state by executing the drive control of the second bridge drive unit 524. Thereby, the MPU 62 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 521.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable winning device 5 includes a ball-entry state switching means, when the open / close execution mode is entered, the variable winning device 5 is predetermined by switching to the first ball-entry-possible state by the ball-entry state switching means. A game ball can be inserted into the first winning opening 51 that executes the payout of a number of prize balls, and by switching to the second winning state by the entry state switching means, the first winning opening A game ball can be inserted into a second winning opening 52 that pays out more prize balls than 51. Further, when the variable winning device 5 has not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the variable winning device 5 is switched to the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 by switching to the non-entry state by the winning state switching means. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device 5 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the number of prize balls can be changed by switching the ball-entry state switching means by the ball-entry state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of.

(2) When the small prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball entry enable state by the ball entry state switching means, and the prize ball determination process multi-prize. When a ball is selected, the player is aware of the selection result of the prize ball determination process because it is provided with a large prize opening opening process for switching to the second ball-entry state by the ball entry state switching means. Therefore, it is expected that the second ball can be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(3) Since the prize ball determination process executes a lottery to select either the first ball-entry state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability, the player determines the prize ball. We will pay attention to the lottery result of the processing, and expect that the second ball can be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) Since the first bridge 512 is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51 side, the first bridge drive unit 514 makes the first bridge 512 with respect to the game board 31. By projecting, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51 via the first bridge 512. Since the second bridge 522 is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52 side, the second bridge drive unit 524 causes the second bridge 522 to project with respect to the game board 31. As a result, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52 via the second bridge 522. Further, since the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 has a first bridge 512 and a second bridge. By immersing the 522 in the game board 31, the ball cannot be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) The first winning opening 51 is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second winning opening 52 is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. The state switching means causes the game ball to enter the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52 by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and left-right directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

(6) Since the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to intersect each other, when they are provided so as not to intersect each other (for example, they are provided so as to be offset in the vertical direction). In comparison with the case), the ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.
(7) In the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522, the slit 5124 of the first bridge 512 and the slit 5224 of the second bridge 522 are recessed from the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522. Since they are provided so as to intersect by engaging with each other along the direction, the configuration of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 can be simplified.

(8) Since the protrusion width D1 of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. The first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31 as compared to the case where the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are used. Therefore, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 first immerses the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522 in the game board 31 and immediately after immersing the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522 in the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522. It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game ball that has been led to the winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52 is made to win in the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52.
(9) Since the upper surface portion of the covers 511 and 521 has a shape protruding toward the opening direction from the lower surface portion of the covers 511 and 521, the upper surface portion of the covers 511 and 521 is projected from the lower surface portion of the covers 511 and 521. Compared with the case where the shape does not protrude toward the opening direction, the game ball is less likely to erroneously win a prize in the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52.

In the present embodiment, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 have the slit 5124 of the first bridge 512 and the slit 5224 of the second bridge 522 as the first bridge 512 and the second bridge. It was provided so as to intersect by meshing along the sinking direction of the 522, but it may be provided so as to intersect by another structure.

FIG. 35 is a perspective view showing a detailed configuration of a modified example of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state where the first bridge is projected.
As shown in FIG. 35, the first bridge 512 has a flat plate portion 5121K.
The second bridge 522 has a one-sided bridge piece 5221K located on the cover 521 side (+ X-axis direction side) and a other-side bridge piece 5222K located on the cover 511 side (+ X-axis direction side).

As described above, in this modification, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 have a one-sided bridge piece 5221K that positions the second bridge 522 on one side in the horizontal direction and the other that is located on the other side in the horizontal direction. It is provided so as to intersect with the side bridge piece 5222K by dividing it into pieces.
According to this, since the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to intersect with each other by dividing the second bridge 522, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge The configuration of the 522 can be simplified.

In this modification, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to intersect with each other by dividing the second bridge 522, but the first bridge 512 is divided. By doing so, it may be provided so as to intersect, or it may be provided so as to intersect by dividing both the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522. In short, the first bridge and the second bridge may be provided so as to intersect by dividing either the first bridge or the second bridge.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first bridge 512 has a flat plate portion 5121, a flat plate portion 5122, and a connecting portion 5123 connecting the flat plate portion 5121 and the flat plate portion 5122, and is formed in a substantially flat plate shape as a whole. It was. The second bridge 522 has a flat plate portion 5221, a flat plate portion 5222, and a connecting portion 5223 connecting the flat plate portion 5221 and the flat plate portion 5222, and is formed in a substantially flat plate shape as a whole. In other words, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 allowed the game ball to fall toward the projecting direction of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522.
On the other hand, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 may prevent the game ball from falling toward the protruding direction side of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522.

FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing a detailed configuration of a modified example of the first bridge and the second bridge in a state where the first bridge is projected.
As shown in FIG. 36, the first bridge 512 has a flat plate portion 5121, a flat plate portion 5122, a connecting portion 5123 connecting the flat plate portion 5121 and the flat plate portion 5122, and the first bridge 512 to the projecting direction side. It has a fall prevention unit 5125 that prevents the game ball from falling.
The fall prevention portion 5125 is formed so as to stand up from the edge of the flat plate portion 5121 and the flat plate portion 5122 on the + Y-axis direction side toward the + Z-axis direction.

The second bridge 522 prevents the flat plate portion 5221, the flat plate portion 5222, the connecting portion 5223 connecting the flat plate portion 5221 and the flat plate portion 5222, and the game ball from falling toward the protruding direction side of the second bridge 522. It has a fall prevention unit 5225.
The fall prevention portion 5225 is formed so as to stand up from the edge of the flat plate portion 5221 and the flat plate portion 5222 on the + Y-axis direction side toward the + Z-axis direction.

According to this, the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 include fall prevention portions 5125 and 5225 that prevent the game ball from falling toward the protruding direction side of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522. Therefore, it is possible to reliably insert the game ball into the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52.

In this modification, both the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are fall prevention portions 5125 that prevent the game ball from falling toward the protruding direction side of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522. , 5225. On the other hand, the first bridge 512 may not be provided with the fall prevention unit 5125, and the second bridge 522 may not be provided with the fall prevention unit 5225. In short, at least one of the first bridge and the second bridge may be provided with a fall prevention portion for preventing the game ball from falling toward the projecting direction side of the first bridge and the second bridge.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the variable winning device according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the variable winning device 5 includes a first winning opening 51 provided on the left side of the game area and a second winning opening 52 provided on the right side of the game area.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the variable winning device 5A has a first winning opening 51 provided on the left side of the game area and a second winning opening 51 provided on the right side of the game area. It differs from the first embodiment in that it includes a winning opening 52A.

The first winning opening 51 has a function as a normal winning opening.
The second winning opening 52A is the first in the first embodiment, except that the winning ball is not paid out when the game ball is entered and the letter "V" is displayed on the front surface of the cover 521. It has the same structure as the winning opening of 2. The second winning opening 52A may be configured to pay out the winning ball when the game ball is entered.

Further, the second winning opening 52A has a function different from that of the second winning opening 52 in the first embodiment. Specifically, the second winning opening 52A has a function as a V winning opening (specific winning opening). The function as the V winning opening will be described in detail later.
In the following description, the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52A are also simply referred to as the large winning opening 50.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a distribution table in which the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are stored.
As shown in FIG. 38, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is a distribution table (distribution) in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 14) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 38 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 38 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the first distribution table has a plurality of "low probability results (special distribution results corresponding to low probability)" and "most advantageous results (special distribution results corresponding to high probability)". The distribution result of is used as the distribution destination. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 14" are distributed to "low probability results", and "15 to 29" are "most advantageous results". ".

The second distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the holding area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 38 (b), the second distribution table uses only the distribution result of the "most advantageous result" as the distribution destination. Specifically, in the second distribution table, all of the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2 are distributed to the "most advantageous result".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first distribution table and the second distribution table are "unspecified small round high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to small round)" and "explicit small round high probability result (explicit small round high probability result). It differs from the first embodiment in that the distribution result of "high probability result corresponding to a small number of rounds)" is not used as the distribution destination.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S815. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, when it is determined in step S804 that the winning / failing result is not the "special deviation result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be the "big hit winning". Is different from the first embodiment in that step S808 is executed, step S808 is executed, and then the processes after step S810 are executed.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the V winning detection process of step S1025A is executed after executing step S1006.

In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the large winning opening 50 is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 50 is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1002.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 50 is open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1006.

First, in step S1001, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 50 is not open (processes after step S1002) will be described.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the timer counter T is set in step S1003. It is determined whether or not the value is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S1004.
Hereinafter, the process of opening the large winning opening in step S1004 will be described in detail.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1112A. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S1103 or the process of step S1106 is executed, and then the processes of steps S1109A and subsequent steps are executed.
In step S1109A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "most advantageous result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1109A that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" (when it is determined to be the "low probability result"), the MPU 62 executes the normal winning opening opening execution process in step S1110A. To do. In this normal winning opening opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the first bridge driving unit 514 to project the first bridge 512 and set the first winning opening 51 in the open state. .. After that, the MPU 62 finishes the large winning opening opening process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1109A that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", in step S1111A, whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "15" or more is determined. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1111A that the value of the round counter RC is not "15" or more, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1110A described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1111A that the value of the round counter RC is "15" or more, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the V winning opening in step S1112A. In the opening execution process of the V winning opening, the MPU 62 projects the second bridge 522 and sets the second winning opening 52A in the open state by executing the drive control of the second bridge driving unit 524. .. After that, the MPU 62 finishes the large winning opening opening process.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the processes after step S1005 will be described with reference to FIG. 40.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S1005 after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S1004. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1005 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the large winning opening 50 has been set to the open state based on the release command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1001, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 50 is open (processes after step S1006) will be described.
In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1103 or step S1106 of the large winning opening opening process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1025A.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1018.

First, in step S1006, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be not "0" or less (processing after step S1025A) will be described.
In step S1025A, the MPU 62 executes the V winning detection process.
Hereinafter, the V prize detection process will be described in detail.

<V prize detection processing>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the V winning detection process.
In the V winning detection process, as shown in FIG. 42, steps S1301A to S1305A are executed.
In step S1301A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the second winning opening 52A. The determination of whether or not a prize has been generated in the second winning opening 52A is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the second winning opening 52A.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1301A that the second winning opening 52A has not been won, the MPU 62 ends the V winning detection process without executing the processes after step S1302A.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1301A that the second winning opening 52A has been won, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the V winning opening in step S1302A. In the closing execution process of the V winning opening, the MPU 62 immerses the second bridge 522 and sets the second winning opening 52A in the closed state by executing the drive control of the second bridge driving unit 524.

In step S1303A, the MPU 62 normally executes the opening execution process of the winning opening. In the normal opening execution process of the winning opening, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the first bridge driving unit 514 to project the first bridge 512 and set the first winning opening 51 in the open state.
In step S1304A, the MPU 62 sets the V winning flag in the RAM 64. This V winning flag is a flag for identifying that a winning has occurred in the second winning opening 52A.

In step S1305A, the MPU 62 sets the V winning command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the V winning detection process. The MPU 62 transmits the V winning command set in step S1305A to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that a prize has been generated in the second prize opening 52A based on the V prize command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the process after step S1007 will be described with reference to FIG. 40.
In step S1007, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the first winning opening 51. The determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the first winning opening 51 is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the first winning opening 51.

When it is determined in step S1007 that the first winning opening 51 has not been won, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1007 that the first winning opening 51 has been won, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S1008.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in step S1010. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the first bridge drive unit 514 when the first bridge 512 is projected and the first winning opening 51 is set to the open state. By immersing the first bridge 512 and setting the first winning opening 51 in the closed state. Further, in the closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the second bridge drive unit 524 when the second bridge 522 is projected and the second winning opening 52A is set to the open state. As a result, the second bridge 522 is immersed and the second winning opening 52A is set to the closed state.

In step S1011 the MPU 62 sets the closure command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the large winning opening 50 has been set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1023, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the hit / fail result is not the "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1013.
In step S1013, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is from setting the large winning opening 50 to the open state, setting the large winning opening 50 to the closed state again, and setting the large winning opening 50 to the open state again. The opening standby time is specified. In this embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016.
In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1006, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be “0” or less (processing after step S1018) will be described.
In step S1018, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S1010 described above.
In step S1019, the MPU 62 sets the close command in the same manner as in step S1011 described above.

In step S1020, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
The MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1021 when it is determined in step S1020 that the winning / failing result is not the "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be the "big hit winning".
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1023.

First, in step S1020, a process (processes after step S1021) when the pass / fail result is determined not to be a "special deviation result" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1021, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1022, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Next, in step S1012 or step S1020, a process (processes after step S1023) when the pass / fail result is determined by the MPU 62 to be a “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S1023, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC.

In step S1024, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1401A to S1408A as shown in FIG. 43.
In step S1401A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "most advantageous result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1401A that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1402A.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1401A that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1407A.

First, in step S1401A, a process (processes after step S1402A) when the distribution result is determined to be the "most advantageous result" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1402A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1402A that the V winning flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1407A.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1402A that the V winning flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1403A. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until 50 game rounds are exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the high-probability mode flag when it has completed 50 game rounds. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes as game turn control processes in step S303 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In step S1404A, "50" is set to the value of the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1405A, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1406A, the MPU 62 sets the number limit flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets a flag (low probability result flag and most advantageous result flag) set in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result, a special deviation flag, or a V. Clear the winning flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start processing described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64. There is.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 50 games, which is the end reference number set in the game count counter, are played. Continue until the times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 50 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in step S1401A, processing when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result", or in step S1402A, the MPU 62 determines that the V winning flag is not set in the RAM 64. (Processing after step S1407A) will be described.
In step S1407A, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues until at least the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit" and the distribution result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1408A, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1405A described above.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game count counter, are played. Continue until the times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if a prize is won in the second winning opening 52A after the winning / losing lottery is a "big hit" and the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the game is played. Regardless of the current gaming state, the state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode). The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode shift to the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode when 50 game times have been completed without becoming a "big hit win" in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, if there is no winning in the second winning opening 52A after the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit" and the sorting result becomes the "most advantageous result" in the sorting lottery, or the winning / losing lottery If the "big hit win" is obtained and the distribution result is "low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. After the end of), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is low when 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning or losing lottery. Move to frequency support mode.

In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. It functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode.
Further, the variable winning device 5A is in a state where the game ball can be entered when the opening / closing execution mode is entered.

Further, in the present embodiment, each of the bridges 512 and 522 and each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 allows the game ball to enter the first winning opening 51 and does not allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 52A. The first winning state, the second winning state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52A, and the game ball is not inserted into the first winning opening 51, and the first winning state. Switching between a non-entry state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter either of the opening 51 and the second winning opening 52A, and a ball entry state switching provided between the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52A. It is functioning as a means.

Specifically, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 makes the first bridge 512 project with respect to the game board 31, and the second bridge 522 immerses the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31. It is switched to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51 via the bridge 512. Each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 passes through the second bridge 522 by projecting the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31 and immersing the first bridge 512 with respect to the game board 31. It is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52A. Each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 switches the ball into a non-entry state by immersing the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31.
In other words, each bridge drive unit 514,524 switches between enabling and disabling the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 to enable the first ball, the second ball, and the ball. It is not possible to effectively set both the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 in the first ball-fillable state and the second ball-fillable state by switching the ball-impossible state.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry-possible state by the ball-entry state switching means, and opens / closes. If the mode has not been changed, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the ball entry impossible state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2109, the process after step S2113 is executed, and the process of step S2116 is executed. This is different from the first embodiment in that the processes of steps S2117A to S2119A are executed before the process is performed.

In step S2117A, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the V winning command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117A that the V winning command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2116.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the V winning command has been received in step S2117A, the MPU 92 executes the determination process of the V winning notification effect in step S2118A. In the determination process of the V winning notification effect, the MPU 92 determines the execution of the V winning notification effect that notifies the player that a prize has been generated in the second winning opening 52A.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

In step S2119A, the MPU 92 sets a V winning notification command including information related to the V winning notification effect determined in step S2118A. Then, the MPU 92 stores the V winning notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This V winning notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the V prize notification effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the V prize notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the V winning notification effect.

After executing the process of step S2119A, or when it is determined that the V winning command has not been received in step S2117A, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2116 and subsequent steps as in the first embodiment.

<About the flow when shifting to the open / close execution mode>
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device and a variable winning device when the open / close execution mode is entered. Note that FIG. 45 is a simplified diagram of the variable winning device 5A below the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 45A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode. FIGS. 45 (B) and 45 (C) are diagrams showing a flow before generating a prize in the second winning opening 52A. FIGS. 45 (D) and 45 (E) are diagrams showing a flow after generating a prize in the second winning opening 52A.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 45 (A). In the example of FIG. 45, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as a stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "best result".

When the MPU 102 receives the open / close execution mode command, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to execute the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced and displayed, and the symbol display device 47 is displayed. The characters "BONUS!" Are displayed in the center of the screen G.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (C), the MPU 102 displays a character (for example, "ROUND1") indicating the number of times the round game is executed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and starts the round game. .. Then, the MPU 102 displays the characters "Aim for V !!" at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and prompts the player to win a prize in the second winning opening 52A.
Further, in the first round game, the MPU 62 determines in step S1111A that the value of the round counter RC is "15" or more, so that in step S1112A, the opening execution process of the V winning opening is executed. In the opening execution process of the V winning opening, the MPU 62 projects the second bridge 522 and sets the second winning opening 52A in the open state by executing the drive control of the second bridge driving unit 524. .. Thereby, the MPU 62 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 521.

When a prize is generated in the second winning opening 52A, the MPU 102 displays the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 45 (D) based on the V winning notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. The letter "V" indicating that a prize has been won in the second winning opening 52A is displayed in large size at the center position of.
Further, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the V winning opening in step S1302A. In the closing execution process of the V winning opening, the MPU 62 immerses the second bridge 522 and sets the second winning opening 52A in the closed state by executing the drive control of the second bridge driving unit 524. ..

After that, the MPU 62 executes the normal winning opening opening execution process in step S1303A. In the opening execution process of the normal winning opening, the MPU 62 projects the first bridge 512 by executing the drive control of the first bridge drive unit 514 as shown in FIG. 45 (E). The winning opening 51 is set to the open state. Thereby, the MPU 62 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 511.

If the second winning opening 52A is not won, the MPU 62 elapses after 30 sec, which is the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1106 of the large winning opening opening process. , In step S1018, the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the second bridge driving unit 524 to immerse the second bridge 522 and set the second winning opening 52A to the closed state, and the next round. Start the game. In this case, as described above, the game state shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) regardless of the current game state. To do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. It functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the open / close execution mode.
Further, in the present embodiment, the normal control state includes a low probability mode (first game state) and a high probability mode (second game state) different from the low probability mode.

Then, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 5A has a first winning opening 51 (normal winning opening) that executes a predetermined number of winning balls when the game ball is entered, and a normal control when the game ball is entered. It is provided with a second winning opening 52A (specific winning opening) that sets the state to the high probability mode.
In the present embodiment, the normal control state includes a low probability mode (first game state) and a high probability mode (second game state) different from the low probability mode, but games other than these. The state may be a normal control state. For example, in the normal control state, the low frequency support mode may be set as the first gaming state, and the high frequency support mode may be set as the second gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 uses the ball entry state switching means based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. When the game ball does not enter the second winning opening 52A in the large winning opening opening process (entry state determination unit) that determines whether or not to switch to the second winning state, and in the open / close execution mode. Set the normal control state to the low probability mode, and set the normal control state to the high probability mode when the game ball enters the second winning opening 52A. Transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode (game state setting unit) ) And.
Then, in the present embodiment, the ball-entry state switching means switches the second ball-entry state to the first ball-entry state when the game ball enters the second winning opening 52A.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable winning device 5A is provided with the ball-entry state switching means, when the open / close execution mode is entered, the variable winning device 5A is predetermined by switching to the first ball-entry-possible state by the ball-entry state switching means. A game ball can be inserted into the first winning opening 51 that executes the payout of a number of prize balls, and the normal control state is raised by switching to the second winning state by the ball entry state switching means. A game ball can be inserted into the second winning opening 52A set in the probability mode. Further, when the variable winning device 5A has not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the variable winning device 5A is switched to the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52A by switching to the non-entry state by the winning state switching means. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device 5A shifts to the open / close execution mode, the normal control state can be set to the high probability mode by switching the ball-entry state switching means by the ball-entry state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of a person to a game.

(2) The main control device 60 is second-entered by the ball-entry state switching means based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Since the player is provided with a large winning opening opening process for deciding whether or not to switch to the ball-enabled state, the player pays attention to the decision result of the large winning opening opening process, and the second ball-capable state is set. Will be expected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(3) The ball-entry state switching means switches the second ball-entry state to the first ball-possible state when the game ball enters the second winning opening 52A. After the game ball is inserted into the winning opening 52A of 2, the game ball can be inserted into the first winning opening 51. Then, the first prize opening 51 can execute a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out when the game ball is entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play the game comfortably.

(4) Since the first bridge 512 is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51 side, the first bridge drive unit 514 makes the first bridge 512 with respect to the game board 31. By projecting, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51 via the first bridge 512. Since the second bridge 522 is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52A side, the second bridge drive unit 524 causes the second bridge 522 to project with respect to the game board 31. As a result, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52A via the second bridge 522. Further, since the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52A are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 has a first bridge 512 and a second bridge. By immersing the 522 in the game board 31, the ball cannot be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) The first winning opening 51 is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second winning opening 52A is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. The state switching means causes the game ball to enter the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52A by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and left-right directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-inability state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

(6) Since the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to intersect each other, when they are provided so as not to intersect each other (for example, they are provided so as to be offset in the vertical direction). In comparison with the case), the ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.
(7) In the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522, the slit 5124 of the first bridge 512 and the slit 5224 of the second bridge 522 are recessed from the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522. Since they are provided so as to intersect by engaging with each other along the direction, the configuration of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 can be simplified.

(8) Since the protrusion width D1 of the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 from the game board 31 is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. The first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31 as compared to the case where the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are used. Therefore, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 first immerses the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522 in the game board 31 and immediately after immersing the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522 in the first bridge 512 or the second bridge 522. It is possible to suppress over-winning that causes the game ball that has been led to the winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52A to win the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52A.
(9) Since the upper surface portion of the covers 511 and 521 has a shape protruding toward the opening direction from the lower surface portion of the covers 511, 521, the upper surface portion of the covers 511, 521 is projected from the lower surface portion of the covers 511, 521. Compared with the case where the shape does not protrude toward the opening direction, the game ball is less likely to erroneously win a prize in the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52A.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a front view of the game board according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a first winning opening 51 and a second winning opening 52 provided below the game area, and the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 are , Both functioned as the grand prize opening 50.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, the game board 31B includes a first winning opening 51B and a second winning opening 52B provided at the lower right of the game area, and the first winning opening 52B is provided. The winning opening 51B has the same function as the lower operating opening 37 in the first embodiment, and the second winning opening 52B is a variable winning device that executes a predetermined number of winning balls when the game balls are entered. It differs from the first embodiment in that it functions as a large winning opening 50 of 5B.

The player maximizes the amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the side opposite to it. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the first winning opening 51B and the second winning opening 52B while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

In the following description of the game board 31B, components having the same functions as those of the first embodiment and having different shapes and arrangements will be described with the same reference numerals.

The game board 31B has a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing in the game area. Further, the game board 31B has a general winning opening 30, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry portion) 36, a first winning opening (second starting ball entry portion) 51B, and a second opening. It has a winning opening 52B and an out opening 39. Further, the game board 31B includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided in the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 31B has a large number of nails 44 planted for appropriately dispersing or adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 30, the upper operating opening 36, the first winning opening 51B, and the various winning openings of the first winning opening 52B is a detection sensor 40a to 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball (see FIG. 50). These detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31B. Specifically, the upper operating port 36 is provided with a detection sensor 40a, the first winning opening 51B is provided with a detection sensor 40b, the second winning opening 52B is provided with a detection sensor 40c, and the general winning opening 30 is , The detection sensor 40d is provided. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 30. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when the ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when the ball enters the first winning port 51B. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the second prize opening 52B. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in the upper operating opening 36 and the first winning opening 51B may be different.

FIG. 47 is an enlarged front view of the game board in the vicinity of the first winning opening and the second winning opening.
As shown in FIG. 47, the first winning opening 51B is provided in the opening 315 formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The first winning opening 51B is provided so as to open to the right, and inside the cover 511B and the cover 511B having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that guides the game ball entered through the opening to the opening 315. In addition to being provided, it also includes the above-mentioned detection sensor 40b that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (three in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
The game ball that is guided by the cover 511B and enters the opening 315 is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 315a. The game ball passing through the discharge passage 315a joins the game ball discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 5) of the out port 39.

The second winning opening 52B is formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing, and is provided in the opening 316 located above the opening 315. The second winning opening 52B is provided so as to open to the left, and inside the cover 521B and the cover 521B having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that guides the game ball entered through the opening to the opening 316. In addition to being provided, it also includes the above-mentioned detection sensor 40c that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
The game ball that is guided by the cover 521B and enters the opening 316 is discharged from the game area via the discharge passage 316a provided so as to merge with the discharge passage 315a described above. The game ball passing through the discharge passage 316a joins the game ball discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 5) of the out port 39 in the same manner as the game ball passing through the discharge passage 315a. become.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 51B is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction (+ X-axis direction side). The second winning opening 52B is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction (-X-axis direction side).
Further, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 51B and the second winning opening 52B function as a ball entering means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area.

Further, the first winning opening 51B includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped first bridge 512B provided on the right side of the cover 511B, and a first bridge driving unit 514B for driving the first bridge 512B. ..
The first bridge 512B is provided so as to be retractable through a hole 313B having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31B, and is provided so as to be inclined from the lower end portion of the cover 511B to the upper end portion of the cover 521B. Has been done.

Further, the second winning opening 52B includes a second bridge 522B having a substantially rectangular plate shape provided on the left side of the cover 521B, and a second bridge driving unit 524B for driving the second bridge 522B. ..
The second bridge 522B is provided so as to be retractable through a hole 314B having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31B, and is provided so as to be inclined from the lower end portion of the cover 521B to the upper portion of the cover 511B. ing.

The first bridge 512B is provided so as to have a steeper slope as compared with the second bridge 522B. Further, the first bridge 512B is hung between the opening of the cover 511B and the opening of the cover 521B, whereas the second bridge 522B has the opening of the cover 521B and the upper surface portion of the cover 511B. It is hung between the left end of. In other words, the horizontal length of the first bridge 512B is shorter than the horizontal length of the second bridge 522B.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first bridge 512B is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board 31B, and is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51B side, and the second bridge is second. The bridge 522 is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board 31, and is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52 side.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first bridge drive unit 514B and the second bridge drive unit 524B function as a bridge drive unit that causes the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B to sink into the game board 31B. doing. In other words, the first bridge drive unit 514B and the second bridge drive unit 524B function as derivative drive units that independently drive the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B are provided so as to intersect each other.

Like the first bridge 512 in the first embodiment, the first bridge 512B has a slit (not shown) formed in the central portion thereof and from the back side to the front side. ..
Like the second bridge 522 in the first embodiment, the second bridge 522B has a slit (not shown) formed in the central portion thereof and from the front side to the back side. ..

The slit of the first bridge 512B and the slit of the second bridge 522B are meshed with each other along the recessing direction (Y-axis direction) of the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B have the slit of the first bridge 512B and the slit of the second bridge 522B as the first bridge 512B and the second bridge. It is provided so as to intersect by engaging with each other along the sinking direction of the 522B.

Here, the game board 31B includes a panel 53B provided so as to cover the front side of the first winning opening 51B and the second winning opening 52B. The panel 53B is provided around the transparent panel 53B1 formed transparently (or translucently) so that the first winning opening 51B and the second winning opening 52B can be seen from the front side, and the transparent panel 53B1. It also has an opaque panel 53B2 formed opaquely.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the first winning opening 51B and the second winning opening 52B from the front through the transparent panel 53B1 and the window portion 21.

FIG. 48 is a schematic view showing the front surface of the first winning opening and the second winning opening in a state where the first bridge is recessed. Specifically, FIG. 48 (A) is a diagram showing a flow path of a game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B when the first bridge 512B is projected, and FIG. 48 (B) is a diagram showing a flow path of the game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B. It is a figure which shows the flow path of the game ball which fell above the cover 521B when the bridge 512B of the above was immersed.
As shown in FIG. 48A, the first bridge drive unit 514B (see FIG. 47) projects the first bridge 512B from the game board 31B through the hole 313B formed in the game board 31B. Since the first bridge 512B is provided so as to incline from the lower end of the cover 511B to the upper end of the cover 521B, the first bridge 512B flows down the game area between the cover 511B and the cover 521B by projecting from the game board 31B. The game ball to be played can be guided to the opening of the cover 511B (see the arrow in the figure).

The game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the cover 521B, and then moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the first bridge 512B to reach the opening of the cover 511B. Be guided.
The game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the first bridge 512B moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the first bridge 512B and is guided to the opening of the cover 511B. Further, since the game board 31B arranges the nail 44 so as not to drop the game ball above the cover 511B, the game ball does not fall above the cover 511B.

Here, the protruding width of the first bridge 512B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the distance between the game board 31B and the panel 53B. In other words, the protrusion width of the first bridge 512B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball (not shown).
In the present embodiment, the protrusion width of the first bridge 512B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. It may be set to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

The opening width of the cover 511B is set to become narrower from the entrance side (right side) to the back side (left side). According to this, the cover 511B can smoothly win the game ball guided along the inclination of the first bridge 512B to the first winning opening 51B.
The upper surface portion of the cover 511B has a shape protruding toward the cover 521B side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 511B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48B, the first bridge drive unit 514B immerses the first bridge 512B into the game board 31B through the hole 313B formed in the game board 31B. By immersing the first bridge 512B in the game board 31B, the first bridge 512B can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511B and the cover 521B to the out port 39.

The game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the cover 521B, and then falls between the cover 511B and the cover 521B and is guided to the out port 39.
The game ball that has fallen between the cover 511B and the cover 521B is directly guided to the out port 39. Further, since the game board 31B arranges the nail 44 so as not to drop the game ball above the cover 511B, the game ball does not fall above the cover 511B.

In this way, the first winning opening 51B is in an open state (support state or guide state) in which the first bridge 512B as a guide piece (support piece) is projected from the game board 31B to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511B. ) And a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) in which the first bridge 512B is immersed in the game board 31B and the game ball is guided to the out port 39.
Then, the first bridge drive unit 514B sets the first winning opening 51B to either the open state or the closed state by driving the first bridge 512B.

In other words, the first bridge 512B functions as a first derivative that guides the game ball to the first winning opening 51B.
Then, the first bridge drive unit 514B sets the first bridge 512B to be valid (open state) by projecting the first bridge 512B with respect to the game board 31B, and plays the first bridge 512B. The first bridge 512B is set to be invalid (closed state) by immersing it in the board 31B.

As described above, the protrusion width of the first bridge 512B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, so that it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball, for example. The first bridge 512B can be quickly immersed in the game board 31B as compared with the case where the first bridge 512B is used.
According to this, the first bridge drive unit 514B is at the first bridge 512B immediately after the first winning opening 51B is set to the closed state and immediately before the first winning opening 51B is set to the closed state. It is possible to suppress over-winning, which causes the game ball led to the opening of the cover 511B to win the first winning opening 51B.

Further, as described above, since the upper surface portion of the cover 511B has a shape protruding toward the cover 521B side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 511B, the first winning opening 51B is set to the closed state. In this case, the game ball is erroneously placed in the first winning opening 51B as compared with the case where the upper surface portion of the cover 511B does not protrude toward the cover 521B side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 511B. It becomes difficult to win a prize.
In the present embodiment, the upper surface portion of the cover 511B has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 521B side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 511B, but may have a shape that does not protrude.

FIG. 49 is a schematic view showing the front surface of the first winning opening and the second winning opening in a state where the second bridge is recessed. Specifically, FIG. 49 (A) is a diagram showing a flow path of a game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B when the second bridge 522B is projected, and FIG. 49 (B) is a diagram showing a flow path of the game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B. It is a figure which shows the flow path of the game ball which fell above the cover 521B when the bridge 522B of the above was immersed.
As shown in FIG. 49A, the second bridge drive unit 524B (see FIG. 47) projects the first bridge 522B from the game board 31B through the hole 314B formed in the game board 31B. Since the second bridge 522B is provided so as to incline from the lower end of the cover 521B to the upper part of the cover 511B, the second bridge 522B flows down the game area between the cover 511B and the cover 521B by projecting from the game board 31B. The game ball can be guided to the opening of the cover 521B (see the arrow in the figure).

The game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the cover 521B, and then moves to the right along the inclination of the upper surface of the second bridge 522B to reach the opening of the cover 521B. Be guided.
The game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the second bridge 522B moves to the right along the inclination of the upper surface of the second bridge 522B and is guided to the opening of the cover 521B. Further, since the game board 31B arranges the nail 44 so as not to drop the game ball above the cover 511B, the game ball does not fall above the cover 511B.

Here, the protruding width of the second bridge 522B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the distance between the game board 31B and the panel 53B. In other words, the protrusion width of the second bridge 522B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball (not shown).
In the present embodiment, the protrusion width of the second bridge 522B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. It may be set to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

The opening width of the cover 521B is set to become narrower from the entrance side (right side) to the back side (left side). According to this, the cover 521B can smoothly win the game ball guided along the inclination of the second bridge 522B to the second winning opening 52B.
The upper surface of the cover 521B has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 511B (opening direction side) from the lower surface of the cover 521B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 49B, the second bridge drive unit 524B immerses the second bridge 522B into the game board 31B through the hole 314B formed in the game board 31B. By immersing the second bridge 522B in the game board 31B, the second bridge 522B can guide the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511B and the cover 521B to the out port 39.

The game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the cover 521B, and then falls between the cover 511B and the cover 521B and is guided to the out port 39.
The game ball that has fallen between the cover 511B and the cover 521B falls directly between the cover 511B and the cover 521B and is guided to the out port 39. Further, since the game board 31B arranges the nail 44 so as not to drop the game ball above the cover 511B, the game ball does not fall above the cover 511B.

In this way, the second winning opening 52B is in an open state in which the second bridge 522B is projected from the game board 31B to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 521B, and the second bridge 522B is immersed in the game board 31B. It has a closed state in which the game ball is guided to the out port 39.
Then, the second bridge drive unit 524B sets the second winning opening 52B to either the open state or the closed state by driving the second bridge 522B.

In other words, the second bridge 522B functions as a second derivative that guides the game ball to the second winning opening 52B.
Then, the second bridge drive unit 524B sets the second bridge 522B to be valid (open state) by projecting the second bridge 522B with respect to the game board 31B, and plays the second bridge 522B. The second bridge 522B is disabled (closed) by immersing it in the board 31B.

As described above, the protruding width of the second bridge 522B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, so that it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball, for example. The second bridge 522B can be quickly immersed in the game board 31B as compared with the case where the second bridge 522B is used.
According to this, the second bridge drive unit 524B is at the second bridge 522B immediately after the second winning opening 52B is set to the closed state and immediately before the second winning opening 52B is set to the closed state. It is possible to suppress over-winning, which causes the game ball led to the opening of the cover 521B to be won in the second winning opening 52B.

Further, as described above, since the upper surface portion of the cover 521B has a shape protruding toward the cover 511B side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 521B, the second winning opening 52B is set to the closed state. In this case, the game ball is erroneously placed in the second winning opening 52B as compared with the case where the upper surface portion of the cover 521B does not protrude toward the cover 511B side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 521B. It becomes difficult to win a prize.
In the present embodiment, the upper surface portion of the cover 521B has a shape that protrudes toward the cover 511B side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 521B, but may have a shape that does not protrude.

Specifically, the second winning opening 52B is normally set to a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the second winning opening 52B is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize.
The open / close execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the second winning opening 52B is set to the open state and the game ball can be inserted into the second winning opening 52B. Further, in the open / close execution mode, after the second winning opening 52B is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, it is called one round game.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main display device 42 includes a main display unit 45 and an accessory display unit 46, and is a segment display or a dot display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. It is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31B so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than that of one game ball. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

The main display unit 45 is performed based on the first result display unit 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating opening 36 and the winning of the first winning opening 51B. It is provided with a second result display unit 45b for displaying the result of the internal lottery (see FIG. 50). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is set (or the open / close execution mode is set). ..

The first result display unit 45a executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 36, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 51B, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the row is performed based on the winning of the first winning opening 51B. Display the result of the internal lottery. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operating opening 36 and the first winning opening 51B are the starting ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball is entered. Functions as.

The accessory display unit 46 executes a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in each through gate 41, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in each through gate 41. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric service open state. In this electric service open state, the first winning opening 51B is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are composed of a segment display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device, the organic EL display device, the CRT, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

The symbol display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the upper operating opening 36 or the first winning opening 51B. That is, when the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, the symbol display device 47 may execute the variation display. The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 47 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 47, and a symbol display. It is provided with a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the device 47.

The first holding lamp unit 49a is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the upper operating port 36, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The first holding lamp unit 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second holding lamp unit 49b is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the game balls that have won a prize in the first winning opening 51B, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The second holding lamp unit 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third holding lamp unit 49c is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The third holding lamp unit 49c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
The holding lamp units 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 47 described later.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 50, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game balls, and a power supply that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game balls. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on a back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electric service holding area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 has a first bridge drive unit 514B for retracting the first bridge 512B of the first winning port 51B and a second bridge 522B for the second winning opening 52B. It is connected to the second bridge drive unit 524B, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first bridge drive unit 514B to sink the first bridge 512B. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the second bridge drive unit 524B to sink the second bridge 522B. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating opening 36 and the first winning opening 51B. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts output from the power supply / launch control device 80. .. Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40f are one-to-one with each of the general winning openings 30, the upper operating opening 36, the first winning opening 51B, the second winning opening 52B, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41. It is provided correspondingly in. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f, the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for various winning openings, out openings 39, and through gates 41. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the upper operating opening 36 or the first winning opening 51B.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to the player during a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. To do.

The power supply / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the power supply / emission control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 81. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34. The power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch a game ball when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning process for the operating port, the normal process, the game state transition process, and the large winning port opening process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process for the operating port, the normal process, the game state transition process, and the large winning port opening process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S203B is executed instead of the process of step S203.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40a corresponding to the upper operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether or not the game ball has won the upper operating opening 36 (starting winning). Is determined. When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 36, in step S202, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and holds the holding. The number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won in the upper operating opening 36, in step S203B, the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the first winning opening 51B uses the game ball. By determining whether or not the winning of the winning ball is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the first winning opening 51B.
When it is determined in step S203B that the game ball has not won a prize in the first winning opening 51B, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203B that the game ball has won a prize in the first winning opening 51B, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit in step S204. Then, the reserved number is set as the second start reserved stored number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the electric service support process in step S306B is executed instead of the electric service support process in step S306.

In step S306B, the MPU 62 executes an electric service support process for executing drive control of the first bridge 512B of the first winning opening 51B. In this electric service support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and also performs the electric accessory opening lottery. If the player wins, the opening / closing process of the first winning opening 51B is executed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In the opening / closing process of the first winning opening 51B, the MPU 62 sets the first bridge 512B to be in an open state in which the first bridge 512B is projected from the game board 31B to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511B, and then a predetermined opening / closing time (this implementation In the embodiment, 0.3 sec) is passed, and the first bridge 512B is immersed in the game board 31B to set the closed state in which the game ball is guided to the out port 39.
Here, as described above, the game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B and the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the first bridge 512B reach the upper surface of the first bridge 512B and then reaches the upper surface of the first bridge 512B. It takes a passage time shorter than the opening / closing time (up to 0.2 sec in this embodiment), moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the first bridge 512B, and is guided to the opening of the cover 511B (FIG. 48 (FIG. 48). See A)). In other words, the opening / closing time of the first bridge 512B is longer than the passing time of the game ball that moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the first bridge 512B and is guided to the opening of the cover 511B. The bridge 512B of 1 can reliably guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511B.

Since the nail 44 is arranged on the game board 31B so as not to drop the game ball above the cover 511B, the game ball does not fall above the cover 511B, but falls above the cover 511B. We will also consider the case where it is done. When the game ball falls above the cover 511B, it moves to the right along the inclination of the upper surface of the cover 511B, and then moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the first bridge 512B to cover the cover. It will be guided to the opening of 511B, decelerate on the upper surface of the first bridge 512B, and change its traveling direction.
Therefore, the game ball moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the first bridge 512B over a passage time longer than the opening / closing time of the first bridge 512B, and is guided to the opening of the cover 511B. In some cases. In this case, since the MPU 62 immerses the first bridge 512B in the game board 31B before the game ball is inserted into the opening of the cover 511B, the game ball is placed between the cover 511B and the cover 521B. It will fall and be guided to the out port 39. In other words, the first winning opening 51B is configured to drop the game ball on the upper surface of the first bridge 512B at a position where the traveling direction of the game ball is not changed.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S815. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S809 is not executed.

In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S812 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

First, in step S801, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (processes after step S802) will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been completed. When it is determined in step S802 that the variation display of the main display unit 45 has not been completed, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been completed, whether or not the result of winning or failing corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode in step S803. Is determined. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processes after step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the winning / failing result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "normal deviation result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times that the large winning opening 50 of the variable winning device 5B is opened / closed by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be a "big hit winning", the sorting result is determined in step S806. Is a low-round high-accuracy result (“unspecified low-round high-accuracy result” or “explicit low-round high-accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the MPU 62 sets “2” in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S807. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result", the step. In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

After executing any of the processes of step S805, step S807, and step S808, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as a waiting time (standby period) for opening in step S810. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the timer counter T is set to the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, the waiting time may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S811, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S811 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1110B. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S1110B is executed instead of the process of steps S1107 to S1109.

In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", in step S1102, "8" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and the step In S1103, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning / failing result is not the "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1104, and the distribution result in step S1105. Is a small round high probability result (“unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high probability result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is a low-round high-accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1106. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1106, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening in step S1110B. In the opening execution process of the large winning opening, the MPU 62 sets the second winning opening 52B in the open state by executing the drive control of the second bridge driving unit 524B. After that, the MPU 62 finishes the large winning opening opening process.

Therefore, in the large winning opening opening / closing process (opening / closing process of the second winning opening 52B), the MPU 62 is set to an open state in which the second bridge 522B is projected from the game board 31B to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 521B. After that, the second bridge 522B is used as the game board 31B when the upper limit of eight game balls is won in the large winning opening 50 or when the predetermined opening / closing time (30 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed. It is set to a closed state in which the game ball is immersed and guided to the out port 39.
Here, as described above, the game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B and the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the second bridge 522B have a certain passage time after reaching the upper surface of the second bridge 522B. It travels to the right along the slope of the upper surface of the second bridge 522B and is guided to the opening of the cover 521B (see FIG. 49 (A)).
Specifically, the game ball that has fallen above the cover 521B moves to the right along the inclination of the upper surface of the second bridge 522B and is guided to the opening of the cover 521B. The game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the second bridge 522B moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the cover 521B, and then moves to the right along the inclination of the upper surface of the second bridge 522B to move to the right. It will be guided to the opening of the bridge, and will decelerate on the upper surface of the second bridge 522B and change its traveling direction. However, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the second bridge 522B in an open state in which the second bridge 522B protrudes from the game board 31B and guides the game ball to the opening of the cover 521B, and then wins a large prize of eight game balls, which is the upper limit. A closed state in which the second bridge 522B is immersed in the game board 31B and the game ball is guided to the out port 39 when the mouth 50 is awarded a prize or the predetermined opening / closing time (30 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed. Since the setting is set to, the second bridge 522B can make the large winning opening 50 win the upper limit of eight game balls before the opening / closing time of the second winning opening 52B elapses, and covers the game balls. It can surely lead to the opening of 521B.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is used by the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating opening 36 and the first winning opening 51B. It functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state to an advantageous opening / closing execution mode.
Further, the variable winning device 5B is in a state where the game ball can be entered when the opening / closing execution mode is entered.

Further, in the present embodiment, each of the bridges 512B and 522B and each of the bridge drive units 514B and 524B has a first winning state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51B and a second winning opening 52B. The first winning state is switched between the second winning state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the ball and the inaccessible state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning opening 51B and the second winning opening 52B. It functions as a ball-entry state switching means provided between the winning opening 51B and the second winning opening 52.

Specifically, the first bridge drive unit 514B inserts the game ball into the first winning opening 51B via the first bridge 512B by projecting the first bridge 512B with respect to the game board 31B. It is switched to the first ball-entry state to make the ball. The second bridge drive unit 524B projects the second bridge 522B with respect to the game board 31B, thereby causing the game ball to enter the second winning opening 52B via the second bridge 522B. It has been switched to the state where it is possible to enter the ball. Each of the bridge drive units 514B and 524B switches the ball into a non-entry state by immersing the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B in the game board 31B.
In other words, each of the bridge drive units 514B and 524B enables / disables the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B, thereby enabling the first ball, the second ball, and the second bridge. The non-entry state can be switched, and both the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B can be effectively set in the first possible entry state and the second possible entry state.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the first winning opening 51B is set to the open state, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball-entry possible state by the ball-entry state switching means, and enters the open / close execution mode. In the case of transition, when the second winning state switching means is used to switch to the second winning state and the first winning opening 51B is set to the closed state, or when the opening / closing execution mode is not shifted, The ball is switched to the non-ball entry state by the ball entry state switching means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 executes the process of steps S210 to S2112 in the first embodiment. It differs from the first embodiment in that the process of step S2113 is executed without any problem.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a ball-entry state switching means, when the first winning opening 51B is set to the open state, the ball-entry state switching means is used to set the first ball-entry state. By switching, the game ball can be entered into the first winning opening 51B that executes an internal lottery when the game ball is entered. Further, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the ball entry state switching means, when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the specific control state, the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the second ball entry enable state by the ball entry state switching means, so that the game ball A game ball can be inserted into the second winning opening 52B, which pays out a predetermined number of prize balls at the time of entering the ball. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 has not shifted to the specific control state or when the first winning opening 51B is set to the closed state, the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the non-entry state by the ball entry state switching means. It is possible to prevent the gaming ball from entering the first winning opening 51B and the second winning opening 52B. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can guide the game ball to a different winning opening by switching the ball-entry state by the ball-entry state switching means, so that the player's attention to the game can be improved. ..

(2) Since the first bridge 512B inclines so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51B side, the first bridge drive unit 514B makes the first bridge 512B with respect to the game board 31B. By projecting, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51B via the first bridge 512B. Since the second bridge 522B is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52B side, the second bridge drive unit 524B causes the second bridge 522B to project with respect to the game board 31B. As a result, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52B via the second bridge 522B. Further, since the first winning opening 51B and the second winning opening 52B are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive units 514B and 524B are the first bridge 512B and the second bridge. By immersing the 522B in the game board 31B, it is possible to switch to the non-entry state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The first winning opening 51B is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second winning opening 52B is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. The state switching means causes the game ball to enter the first winning opening 51B or the second winning opening 52B by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and left-right directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-inability state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

(4) Since the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B are provided so as to intersect each other, when they are provided so as not to intersect each other (for example, they are provided so as to be offset in the vertical direction). In comparison with the case), the ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area.
(5) Since the horizontal length of the first bridge 512B is shorter than the horizontal length of the second bridge 522B, the opening time of the first winning opening 51B is set to the opening time of the second winning opening 52B. Even if it is set shorter than that, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the first winning opening 51B.
(6) The first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B have the slit of the first bridge 512B and the slit of the second bridge 522B in the recessing direction of the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B. Since they are provided so as to intersect with each other by meshing with each other, the configuration of the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B can be simplified.

(7) Since the protrusion width of the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B from the game board 31B is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. The first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B can be quickly immersed in the game board 31B as compared with the case where the first bridge 512B and the second bridge 522B are used. Therefore, each of the bridge drive units 514B and 524B first immerses the first bridge 512B or the second bridge 522B in the game board 31B and immediately after immersing the first bridge 512B or the second bridge 522B in the first bridge 512B or the second bridge 522B. It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game ball led to the winning opening 51B or the second winning opening 52B is made to win in the first winning opening 51B or the second winning opening 52B.
(8) Since the upper surface portions of the covers 511B and 521B have a shape protruding toward the opening direction from the lower surface portions of the covers 511B and 521B, the upper surface portions of the covers 511B and 521B are projected from the lower surface portions of the covers 511B and 521B. Compared with the case where the shape does not protrude toward the opening direction, the game ball is less likely to accidentally win a prize in the first winning opening 51B or the second winning opening 52B.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 is a front view of the game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a variable winning device 5, and the variable winning device 5 includes a first bridge 512 and a second bridge 522.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the game board 31C includes a variable winning device 5C, and the variable winning device 5C includes a rotating bridge 541. Different from.

FIG. 57 is a front view of the variable winning device. In FIG. 57, the vertically upward direction is defined as the + Z axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to the Z axis are described as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
As shown in FIG. 57, the variable winning device 5C is provided below the lower operating port 37. The variable winning device 5C includes a first winning opening 51 provided on the left side of the game area and a second winning opening 52 provided on the right side of the game area.
The player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 5C by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.
In the following description, the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 are also simply referred to as the large winning opening 50.

Here, the game board 31C includes a panel 53 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 5C. The panel 53 is formed to be transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 5C can be visually recognized from the front side.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 5C from the front through the panel 53.

FIG. 58 is a three-view view of the variable winning device. Specifically, FIG. 58 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5C seen from the upper surface side, FIG. 58 (B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5C, and FIG. 58 (C) is a front view. , It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 5C seen from the right side.
As shown in FIG. 58, the variable winning device 5C has a rectangular plate-shaped rotating bridge 541 provided between the cover 511 and the cover 521, extending along the Y-axis direction, and the rotating bridge 541. A rotation shaft 542 whose one end is fixed at the center position in the X-axis direction, a rotation drive unit 543 that is connected to the central portion of the rotation shaft 542 and rotates the rotation shaft 542, and a rotation shaft 542. It is connected to the other end and includes an advancing / retreating drive unit 544 that advances / retreats the rotating shaft 542.

The rotating bridge 541 is provided so as to be retractable through a hole 317 having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31C.
The rotation shaft 542 includes a cylindrical shaft-shaped main body portion 542a, a gear 542b provided at the center position of the main body portion 542a so as to be concentric with the main body portion 542a, and an end of the main body portion 542a on the −Y axis direction side. It is provided with a disk-shaped enlarged diameter portion 542c provided in the portion.
The rotation drive unit 543 includes a gear 543a attached to the tip of the shaft body of the rotation drive unit 543. The rotation drive unit 543 rotates the shaft body around the Y axis to rotate the rotation bridge 541 around the Y axis via the gear 543a and the gear 542b.

Here, the rotation drive unit 543 is in a horizontal state in which the rotation bridge 541 is not rotated, and by rotating the rotation bridge 541 counterclockwise, the lower end portion of the cover 511 to the upper end portion of the cover 521. It has a left-handed rotation state in which it is tilted toward the cover and a right-handed rotation state in which the rotation bridge 541 is rotated clockwise so as to be tilted from the lower end of the cover 521 to the upper end of the cover 511 (FIG. 57). See arrow).
In FIG. 58, the rotation drive unit 543 is set to a right rotation state in which the rotation bridge 541 is rotated clockwise so as to be tilted from the lower end portion of the cover 521 to the upper end portion of the cover 511. ..

The advancing / retreating drive unit 544 is provided at the tip of the shaft body of the advancing / retreating drive unit 544, and includes a rotation support unit 544a that rotatably supports the enlarged diameter portion 542c of the rotation shaft 542 around the Z axis. The advancing / retreating drive unit 544 advances / retreats the rotary bridge 541 along the Y-axis direction via the rotation support portion 544a and the diameter-expanding portion 542c by advancing / retreating the shaft body along the Y-axis direction.

Here, the advance / retreat drive unit 544 flows down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 by projecting the rotation bridge 541 set in the horizontal state through the hole 317 formed in the game board 31C. Cover 511 and cover 521 by immersing the rotating bridge 541 set in the horizontal state through the hole 317 formed in the game board 31C and the protruding state in which the game ball can be placed on the rotating bridge 541. It has an immersive state that makes it impossible to place the game ball flowing down the game area between the two on the rotating bridge 541.
In FIG. 58, the advancing / retreating drive unit 544 projects the rotating bridge 541 through the hole 317 formed in the game board 31C to allow the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521. It is set in a protruding state so that it can be placed on the rotating bridge 541.

Here, the protrusion width D1 of the rotating bridge 541 from the game board 31C is set to be narrower than the distance D2 between the game board 31C and the panel 53. In other words, the protrusion width D1 of the rotating bridge 541 from the game board 31C is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball.
In the present embodiment, the protrusion width D1 of the rotating bridge 541 from the game board 31C is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. It may be set to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

FIG. 59 is an enlarged front view showing a variable winning device when the rotating bridge is in a protruding state. Specifically, FIG. 59 (A) is a diagram showing a variable winning device 5C in which a rotating bridge 541 set in a horizontal state is in a protruding state, and FIG. 59 (B) is a diagram showing a rotating bridge 541 protruding. It is a figure which shows the variable winning apparatus 5C which was set to the left rotation state after it was put into a state, and FIG. It is a figure which shows 5C.

The rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 are set to the left rotation state as shown in FIG. 59 (B) after the rotation bridge 541 is in the protruding state as shown in FIG. 59 (A). For example, a game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 can be guided to the opening of the cover 511.
The rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 are set to the right rotation state as shown in FIG. 59 (C) after the rotation bridge 541 is in the protruding state as shown in FIG. 59 (A). For example, a game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 can be guided to the opening of the cover 521.

If the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 are set to the immersive state after the rotation bridge 541 is set to the horizontal state, the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 is taken out. Can lead to 39.

As described above, the variable winning device 5C is set to the left rotation state or the right rotation state after the rotation bridge 541 is in the protruding state, and the game ball is guided to the opening of the cover 511 or the opening of the cover 521 in the open state. After the rotating bridge 541 is placed in a horizontal state, it is set in an immersive state to guide the game ball to the out port 39 in a closed state.
Then, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 set the large winning opening 50 to either the open state or the closed state by driving the rotation bridge 541.
In other words, the rotating bridge 541 functions as a switching derivative composed of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52.

As described above, the protrusion width D1 of the rotating bridge 541 from the game board 31C is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, and therefore, for example, is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. The rotating bridge 541 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31C as compared with the case where the rotating bridge 541 is used.
According to this, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 are covered by the rotation bridge 541 immediately after the large winning opening 50 is set to the closed state and immediately before the large winning opening 50 is set to the closed state. It is possible to suppress over-winning in which the game ball leading to the opening of the cover or the opening of the cover 521 is made to win in the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rotating bridge 541 is provided between the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52, and is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board 31C. Further, the rotating bridge 541 projects from the game board 31C and then inclines so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51 side to guide the game ball to the first winning opening 51. In the rotating state (left rotating state), after projecting with respect to the game board 31C, the game ball is guided to the second winning opening 52 by inclining so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52 side. A second rotating state (right-handed rotating state) and a horizontal state in which the game ball is held in the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 without being guided to the first winning opening 51 after projecting with respect to the game board 31C. I have.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 project the rotation bridge 541 with respect to the game board 31C and the rotation bridge 541 with respect to the game board 31C. , It functions as a bridge drive unit that rotates the rotation bridge 541.
In other words, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 function as a switching derivative drive unit that integrally drives the rotation bridge 541.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 60, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game balls, and a power supply that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game balls. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on a back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electric service holding area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 has a rotation drive unit 543 that rotates the rotation bridge 541 of the variable winning device 5C, an advance / retreat drive unit 544 that advances / retreats the rotation bridge 541 of the variable winning device 5C, and a main display. It is connected to the unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric accessory open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 to rotate and sink the rotation bridge 541. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts output from the power supply / launch control device 80. .. Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40f are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, various winning ports of the variable winning device 5C, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f, the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for various winning openings, out openings 39, and through gates 41. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to the player during a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. To do.

The power supply / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the power supply / emission control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 81. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34. The power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch a game ball when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process, the large winning opening opening / closing process, and the large winning opening opening process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the game state transition process, the large winning opening opening / closing process, and the large winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S815. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S809 is not executed.

In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S812 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

First, in step S801, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (processes after step S802) will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been completed. When it is determined in step S802 that the variation display of the main display unit 45 has not been completed, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been completed, whether or not the result of winning or failing corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode in step S803. Is determined. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processes after step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the winning / failing result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "normal deviation result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times that the large winning opening 50 of the variable winning device 5C is opened / closed by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be a "big hit winning", the sorting result is determined in step S806. Is a low-round high-accuracy result (“unspecified low-round high-accuracy result” or “explicit low-round high-accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the MPU 62 sets “2” in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S807. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result", the step. In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

After executing any of the processes of step S805, step S807, and step S808, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as a waiting time (standby period) for opening in step S810. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the timer counter T is set to the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, the waiting time may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S811, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S811 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1010C instead of the process of step S1010, executes the process of step S1018C instead of the process of step S1018, and executes the process of step S1018. It differs from the first embodiment in that the processes of steps S1026C and S1027C are executed before the processes are executed.

In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the large winning opening 50 is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 50 is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1002.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 50 is open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1006.

First, in step S1001, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 50 is not open (processes after step S1002) will be described.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the timer counter T is set in step S1003. It is determined whether or not the value is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S1004.
Hereinafter, the process of opening the large winning opening in step S1004 will be described in detail.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1114C. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1106, then executes step S1113C, executes the process of step S1103 or the process of step S1113C, and then performs the process of step S1114C. Is different from the first embodiment.

In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", in step S1102, "8" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and the step In S1103, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning / failing result is not the "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1104, and the distribution result in step S1105. Is a small round high probability result (“unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high probability result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is a low-round high-accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1106. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.
In step S1113C, the MPU 62 executes the round prize ball determination process.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the round prize ball determination process.
In the round prize ball determination process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1501C to S1504C as shown in FIG. 64.
In step S1501C, the MPU 62 executes the round prize ball lottery process. In this round prize ball lottery process, the MPU 62 draws a lottery based on a predetermined probability (50% in the present embodiment) whether the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5C is a multi-prize ball or a small prize ball. Execute.

In step S1502C, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the multi-prize ball has been won in the round prize ball lottery process of step S1501C.
When the MPU 62 determines that the multi-prize ball has been won in step S1502C, the MPU 62 sets the multi-prize ball flag in the RAM 64 in step S1503C.
This multi-prize ball flag is a flag for specifying that the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5C is a multi-prize ball.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the multi-prize ball was not won in step S1502C (when it is determined that the minor prize ball is won), the multi-prize ball stored in the RAM 64 in step S1504C. Clear the flag.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening process, the process after step S1114C will be described with reference to FIG. 63.
After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1113C, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening in step S1114C. In the opening execution process of the large winning opening, the MPU 62 sets the rotation bridge 541 to the protruding state by executing the drive control of the advance / retreat drive unit 544. After that, the MPU 62 finishes the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1102 or step S1104 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 defines the upper limit duration from setting the large winning opening 50 to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode (short-term mode). Aspect) and is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 and the firing cycle of the game balls, and therefore is the upper limit of eight game balls. It is easy to get a prize in the large winning opening 50.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 50. Depending on the timing, it is possible to have about one game ball win in the large winning opening 50.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the process after step S1005 will be described with reference to FIG. 62.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S1005 after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S1004. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1005 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the large winning opening 50 has been set to the open state based on the release command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1001, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 50 is open (processes after step S1006) will be described.
In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1103 or step S1106 of the large winning opening opening process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1026C.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1018C.

First, in step S1006, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be not "0" or less (processing after step S1026C) will be described.
In step S1026C, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "13000" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined time (4 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed after the rotation bridge 541 is set to the protruding state by executing the opening execution process of the large winning opening.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1026C that the value of the timer counter T is not "13000" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1026C that the value of the timer counter T is "13000" or less (executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening, the rotation bridge 541 is set to the protruding state. After that, when it is determined that 4 seconds have passed), the bridge rotation process is executed in step S1027C.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the bridge rotation process.
In the bridge rotation process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1601C to S1605C as shown in FIG. 65.
In step S1601C, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the multi-prize ball flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1601C that the multi-prize ball flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the counterclockwise rotation process in step S1602C. In this left rotation process, the MPU 62 sets the rotation bridge 541 to the left rotation state by executing the drive control of the rotation drive unit 543. In other words, the MPU 62 sets the grand prize opening 50 to the open state.
In step S1603C, the MPU 62 sets a small prize ball command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the bridge rotation process. The MPU 62 transmits the small prize ball command set in step S1603C to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the rotation bridge 541 is set to the counterclockwise rotation state based on the small prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1601C that the multi-prize ball flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the right rotation process in step S1604C. In this right rotation process, the MPU 62 sets the rotation bridge 541 to the right rotation state by executing the drive control of the rotation drive unit 543. In other words, the MPU 62 sets the grand prize opening 50 to the open state.
In step S1605C, the MPU 62 sets the multi-prize ball command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the bridge rotation process. The MPU 62 transmits the multi-prize ball command set in step S1605C to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the rotation bridge 541 is set to the right rotation state based on the multi-prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the process after step S1007 will be described with reference to FIG. 62.
In step S1007, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 50. The determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 50 is executed based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40c and 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 50.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that the winning opening 50 has not been won, the MPU 62 ends the opening / closing process of the winning opening.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1007 that the large winning opening 50 has been won, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S1008.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in step S1010C. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 rotates by executing the drive control of the advance / retreat drive unit 544 after setting the rotation bridge 541 in the horizontal state by executing the drive control of the rotation drive unit 543. Set the bridge 541 to the immersive state. In other words, the MPU 62 sets the grand prize opening 50 in a closed state.

In step S1011 the MPU 62 sets the closure command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the large winning opening 50 has been set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1023, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the hit / fail result is not the "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1013.
In step S1013, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is from setting the large winning opening 50 to the open state, setting the large winning opening 50 to the closed state again, and setting the large winning opening 50 to the open state again. The opening standby time is specified. In this embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016.
In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1006, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be “0” or less (processing after step S1018C) will be described.
In step S1018C, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S1010C described above.
In step S1019, the MPU 62 sets the close command in the same manner as in step S1011 described above.

In step S1020, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
The MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1021 when it is determined in step S1020 that the winning / failing result is not the "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be the "big hit winning".
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1023.

First, in step S1020, a process (processes after step S1021) when the pass / fail result is determined not to be a "special deviation result" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1021, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1022, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Next, in step S1012 or step S1020, a process (processes after step S1023) when the pass / fail result is determined by the MPU 62 to be a “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S1023, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC.

In step S1024, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. It functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode.
Further, the variable winning device 5C is in a state where the game ball can be entered when the opening / closing execution mode is entered.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation bridge 541, the rotation drive unit 543, and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 insert the game ball into the first winning opening 51 and the game ball into the second winning opening 52. A first ball-entry state (left-handed rotation state) in which the ball is not allowed to enter, and a second entry in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52 and the game ball is not inserted into the first winning opening 51. A ball-enabled state (right-handed rotation state), a ball-impossible state (immersive state) in which the game ball is not allowed to enter any of the first winning openings 51 and the second winning opening 52, and a hold for holding the game ball. It switches between the state (horizontal state) and functions as a ball-entry state switching means provided between the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52.

Specifically, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 rotate by setting the rotation bridge 541 to the left rotation state after projecting the rotation bridge 541 with respect to the game board 31C. After switching to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51 via the bridge 541 and projecting the rotating bridge 541 with respect to the game board 31C, the rotating bridge 541 is moved to the right. By setting the rotating state, the game is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the rotating bridge 541, and the rotating bridge 541 is immersed in the game board 31C. By making the player unable to enter the ball, the rotating bridge 541 is projected from the game board 31C, and then the rotating bridge 541 is set to the horizontal state to switch to the holding state.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the main control device 60 is switched to the horizontal state by the ball entry state switching means, and then the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry state. If the player has switched to the enable state and has not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the ball entry impossible state.
Specifically, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state by the ball-entry state switching means, and then again the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state. One round game is taken until the ball is switched to the ball-entry state, and when the open / close execution mode is entered, the ball-entry state switching means is used to switch to the hold state each time the round game is executed, and then the first player is entered. It is switched to the ball-capable state or the second ball-capable state.

In the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the first ball can be entered after the main control device 60 is switched to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means every time the round game is executed. Although it has been switched to the state or the second ball-entry state, it is not necessary to switch to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state every time the round game is executed. For example, the main control device 60 may switch to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state every time a plurality of round games are executed.

Further, the main control device 60 performs a round prize ball determination process (selection of a ball-entry state) for selecting either a small prize ball (first ball-entry state) or a multi-prize ball (second ball-possible state). Part) and when a small prize ball is selected in the round prize ball determination process, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the first entry-capable state, and a multi-prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process. In this case, it is provided with a bridge rotation process (ball entry enable state switching unit) for switching to the second ball entry enable state by the ball entry state switching means.

Here, in the round prize ball determination process, a lottery for selecting either a small prize ball or a multi-prize ball is executed based on a predetermined probability (50% in the present embodiment).
In the present embodiment, the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. , Any method may be adopted as long as one of the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state is selected. For example, the ball-entry state selection unit is in the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state according to the type and expectation of the reach display leading to the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. You may set the lottery probability to select either one.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 executes the process of steps S210 to S2112 in the first embodiment. It differs from the first embodiment in that the process of step S2113 is executed without any problem. Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that the processes of steps S2120C to S2125C are executed before the process of step S2116 is executed.

After executing the process of step S2115, or when it is determined in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, whether or not the MPU 92 has received the small prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S2120C. Is determined.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2120C that the small prize ball command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2123C.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the small prize ball command has been received in step S2120C, the MPU 92 executes the determination process of the small prize ball notification effect in step S2121C. In the process of determining the small prize ball notification effect, the MPU 92 determines the execution of the small prize ball notification effect that notifies the player that the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5C is the small prize ball.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

In step S2122C, the MPU 92 sets a small prize ball notification command including information related to the small prize ball notification effect determined in step S2121C. Then, the MPU 92 stores the prize ball notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This prize ball notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the small prize ball notification effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the small prize ball notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the small prize ball notification effect.

After executing the process of step S2122C, or when it is determined in step S2120C that the small prize ball command has not been received, the MPU 92 receives the multi-prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S2123C. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2123C that the multi-prize ball command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2116.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the multi-prize ball command has been received in step S2123C, the MPU 92 executes the determination process of the multi-prize ball notification effect in step S2124C. In the determination process of the multi-prize ball notification effect, the MPU 92 determines the execution of the multi-prize ball notification effect that notifies the player that the number of prize balls of the variable winning device 5C is the multi-prize ball.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

In step S2125C, the MPU 92 sets a multi-prize ball notification command including information related to the multi-prize ball notification effect determined in step S2124C. Then, the MPU 92 stores the multi-prize ball notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This multi-prize ball notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the multi-prize ball notification effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the multi-prize ball notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the multi-prize ball notification effect.

<About the flow when shifting to the open / close execution mode>
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device and a variable winning device when the open / close execution mode is entered. Note that FIG. 67 is a simplified diagram of the variable winning device 5C below the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 67A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode. FIG. 67B is a diagram showing a display screen G when the large winning opening opening process of step S1004 is executed. FIG. 67 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the counterclockwise rotation process of step S1602C is executed. FIG. 67 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the right rotation process of step S1604C is executed.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 67 (A). In the example of FIG. 67, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "best result".

When the release command is received, the MPU 102 arranges each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in a reduced display at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 67 (B), and displays the symbol. A character (for example, "ROUND1") indicating the number of times the round game is executed is displayed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the device 47, and the round game is started. Further, the MPU 102 displays the characters "BIGorSMALL?" Suggesting the execution of the round prize ball lottery process at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47.
Further, in step S1114C, the MPU 62 sets the rotation bridge 541 to the protruding state by executing the opening execution process of the large winning opening and executing the drive control of the advance / retreat drive unit 544. As a result, the MPU 62 can place the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 on the rotating bridge 541.

After that, when the small prize ball notification command is received, the MPU 102 displays the characters "SMALL" at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 67 (C), and steps S1501C. Notify the player that the multi-prize ball was not won (the small prize ball was won) in the round prize ball lottery process.
Further, the MPU 62 sets the rotation bridge 541 to the left rotation state by executing the left rotation process in step S1602C and executing the drive control of the rotation drive unit 543. As a result, the MPU 62 can guide the game ball mounted on the rotating bridge 541 and the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 511.

On the other hand, when the multi-prize ball notification command is received, the MPU 102 displays the characters "BIG !!" at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 67 (D). The display is displayed, and the player is notified that the multi-prize ball has been won in the round prize ball lottery process of step S1501C.
Further, the MPU 62 sets the rotation bridge 541 to the right rotation state by executing the right rotation process in step S1604C and executing the drive control of the rotation drive unit 543. As a result, the MPU 62 can guide the game ball mounted on the rotating bridge 541 and the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 521.

Here, the MPU 62 has set the rotating bridge 541 in a protruding state so that the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 can be placed on the rotating bridge 541, and then 4 seconds have passed. The rotation bridge 541 is set to the left rotation state or the right rotation state.
Further, as described above, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launch mechanism 81 to send the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 in a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). I'm firing.
Therefore, the MPU 62 sets the rotating bridge 541 in a protruding state so that the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 can be placed on the rotating bridge 541, and then the rotating bridge 541 is placed on the left. A maximum of about 6 game balls can be placed on the rotation bridge 541 before the rotation state or the right rotation state is set.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable winning device 5C is provided with a ball entry state switching means, when the open / close execution mode is entered, the first ball entry is possible after switching to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means. By switching to the state, the game ball can be entered into the first winning opening 51 that executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and the second winning state can be switched by the entry state switching means. As a result, the game ball can be inserted into the second winning opening 52, which executes the payout of more prize balls than the first winning opening 51. Further, when the variable winning device 5C has not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the variable winning device 5C is switched to the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 by switching to the non-entry state by the winning state switching means. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device 5C shifts to the open / close execution mode, the number of winning balls can be changed by switching to the holding state by the ball entry state switching means and then switching the ball entry enable state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) When the main control device 60 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the main control device 60 is switched to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means every time the round game is executed, and then the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry state is reached. Since the player switches to the ball-entry state, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball held by the ball-entry state switching means every time the round game is executed, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can be made to.

(3) When the small prize ball is selected in the round prize ball determination process, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball entry enable state by the ball entry state switching means, and in the round prize ball determination process. When a multi-prize ball is selected, the player has a bridge rotation process for switching to a second ball-entry state by the ball entry state switching means, so that the player pays attention to the selection result of the round prize ball determination process. Therefore, it is expected that the second ball can be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(4) Since the round prize ball determination process executes a lottery to select either the first ball-entry state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability, the player wins the round prize. We will pay attention to the lottery result of the ball determination process, and expect that the second ball can be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) In the counterclockwise rotating state, the rotating bridge 541 projects from the game board 31C and then tilts toward the first winning opening 51 so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51. Since the game ball is guided, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 set the rotation bridge 541 to the counterclockwise rotation state, so that the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51 via the rotation bridge 541. It is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the ball is to be entered. In the clockwise rotation state, the rotating bridge 541 projects from the game board 31C and then inclines so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52, and the game ball is placed in the second winning opening 52. Since it is guided, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 set the rotation bridge 541 to the right rotation state, so that the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52 via the rotation bridge 541. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state. Further, since the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 use the rotation bridge 541 as a game board. By immersing the player in 31C, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Then, in the horizontal state, the rotation bridge 541 projects from the game board 31C and then holds the game ball to the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 without guiding the game ball. The 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 can switch to the hold state in which the game ball is held by setting the rotation bridge 541 in the horizontal state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means. Further, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 can prevent the flow path of the game ball from being obstructed when the ball is switched to the non-entry state.

(6) The first winning opening 51 is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second winning opening 52 is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. The state switching means causes the game ball to enter the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52 by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and left-right directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-inability state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

(7) Since the protruding width D1 of the rotating bridge 541 from the game board 31C is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, it is compared with the case where it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the rotating bridge 541 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31C. Therefore, immediately after the rotation bridge 541 is immersed in the game board 31C, the rotation drive unit 543 and the advance / retreat drive unit 544 use the rotation bridge 541 to make the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52. It is possible to suppress the over-winning that causes the game ball that has been led to the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52 to win a prize.
(8) Since the upper surface portion of the covers 511 and 521 has a shape protruding toward the opening direction from the lower surface portion of the covers 511 and 521, the upper surface portion of the covers 511 and 521 is projected from the lower surface portion of the covers 511 and 521. Compared with the case where the shape does not protrude toward the opening direction, the game ball is less likely to erroneously win a prize in the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52.

In the present embodiment, the rotating bridge 541 allows the game ball to fall toward the protruding direction side of the rotating bridge 541.
On the other hand, the rotating bridge 541 may be provided with a fall prevention portion for preventing the game ball from falling toward the protruding direction side of the rotating bridge 541, as in the modified example of the first embodiment.

According to this, since the rotating bridge 541 is provided with a fall prevention portion for preventing the game ball from falling toward the protruding direction side of the rotating bridge 541, the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 It is possible to reliably insert a game ball into the ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entry state switching means is inserted between the cover 511 and the cover 521 by immersing the rotating bridge 541 set in the horizontal state through the hole 317 formed in the game board 31C. The game ball flowing down the game area is set in an immersive state so that it cannot be placed on the rotating bridge 541, and the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52. It was in a state.

On the other hand, the ball-entry state switching means is set to the horizontal state if it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering any of the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52. A mode other than immersing the rotating bridge 541 through the hole 317 formed in the game board 31C may be adopted.

FIG. 68 is an enlarged front view showing a variable winning device when the rotating bridge is in a state where the ball cannot be entered. Specifically, FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing a flow path of the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the rotating bridge 541 when the rotating bridge 541 is set to the ball entry impossible state, and is a diagram of FIG. 68 (B). ) Is a diagram showing a flow path of a game ball that has fallen above the cover 511 when the rotary bridge 541 is set to the non-entry state, and FIG. 68 (C) is a diagram showing the flow path of the game ball that has fallen above the cover 511. It is a figure which shows the flow path of the game ball which fell above the cover 521 when it was set to the state.

As shown in FIG. 68, the rotation drive unit 543 can be set to a state in which the ball cannot enter by rotating the rotation bridge 541 greatly. In FIG. 68, the rotation drive unit 543 is set in a state in which the ball cannot enter by rotating the rotation bridge 541 largely counterclockwise, but the rotation bridge 541 is largely rotated clockwise. By letting the ball enter, it may be set to a non-entry state. Further, in this case, the ball entry state switching means may not be provided with the advance / retreat drive unit 544, and the game board 31C may not be provided with the hole 317.

As shown in FIG. 68 (A), the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the rotating bridge 541 moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the rotating bridge 541 and is then guided to the out port 39.
Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the game ball that has fallen above the cover 511 moves to the right along the inclination of the upper surface of the cover 511 and is then guided to the out port 39.
Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the game ball that has fallen above the cover 521 moves to the left along the inclination of the upper surface of the cover 521 and is then guided to the out port 39.
The game ball that has fallen between the cover 511 and the rotating bridge 541 or between the cover 521 and the rotating bridge 541 is guided to the out port 39 as it is.

According to this, the rotation drive unit 543 rotates the rotation bridge 541 so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the first winning opening 51 or the second winning opening 52, thereby entering the ball. You can switch to the disabled state. Therefore, the rotation drive unit 543 can switch the rotation bridge 541 to the non-entry state without adding a new structure such as the advance / retreat drive unit 544.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entry state switching means is composed of the rotation bridge 541, the rotation drive unit 543, and the advance / retreat drive unit 544, but other configurations may be adopted. For example, even if the ball entry state switching means is composed of the first bridge 512, the second bridge 522, the first bridge drive unit 514, and the second bridge drive unit 524 in the first embodiment. Good.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a modification of the display screen of the symbol display device and the variable winning device when the open / close execution mode is entered. Note that FIG. 69 is a simplified diagram of the variable winning device 5 below the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 69A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode. FIG. 69B is a diagram showing a display screen G when the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are switched to the hold state. FIG. 69C is a diagram showing a display screen G when the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are switched to the first ball-entry state. FIG. 69 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are switched to the second ball-entry state.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 69 (A). In the example of FIG. 69, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the distribution is performed. The result shows that it is the "best result".

When the release command is received, the MPU 102 arranges each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in a reduced display at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 69 (B), and displays the symbol. A character (for example, "ROUND1") indicating the number of times the round game is executed is displayed at the upper left position of the display screen G of the device 47, and the round game is started. Further, the MPU 102 displays the characters "BIGorSMALL?" Suggesting the execution of the round prize ball lottery process at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47.
Further, the first bridge drive unit 514 and the second bridge drive unit 524 switch to the hold state by projecting the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31. Thereby, the MPU 62 can place the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 on the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522.

After that, when the small prize ball notification command is received, the MPU 102 displays the characters "SMALL" at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 69 (C), and steps S1501C. Notify the player that the multi-prize ball was not won (the small prize ball was won) in the round prize ball lottery process.
Further, the second bridge drive unit 524 switches to the first ball-entry state by immersing the second bridge 522 in the game board 31. Thereby, the MPU 62 guides the game ball mounted on the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 and the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 511. be able to.

On the other hand, when the multi-prize ball notification command is received, the MPU 102 displays the characters "BIG !!" at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 69 (D). The display is displayed, and the player is notified that the multi-prize ball has been won in the round prize ball lottery process of step S1501C.
Further, the first bridge drive unit 514 switches to the second ball-entry state by immersing the first bridge 512 in the game board 31. Thereby, the MPU 62 guides the game ball mounted on the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 and the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the cover 521 to the opening of the cover 521. be able to.

As described above, in the present modification, the bridge drive units 514 and 524 project the first bridge 512 with respect to the game board 31 and immerse the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31. , The game is switched to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51 via the first bridge 512, the second bridge 522 is projected from the game board 31, and the first By immersing the bridge 512 in the game board 31, the first bridge is switched to a second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52 via the second bridge 522. By immersing the 512 and the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31, the ball cannot be entered, and by projecting the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 with respect to the game board 31, the ball is held. Switching to the state. In other words, the ball entry state switching means switches to the hold state in which the game ball is held by effectively setting the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522.

According to this, since the first bridge 512 is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51 side, the first bridge drive unit 514 attaches the first bridge 512 to the game board 31. By projecting against the ball, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51 via the first bridge 512. Since the second bridge 522 is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52 side, the second bridge drive unit 524 causes the second bridge 522 to project with respect to the game board 31. As a result, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52 via the second bridge 522. Further, since the first winning opening 51 and the second winning opening 52 are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 has a first bridge 512 and a second bridge. By immersing the 522 in the game board 31, the ball cannot be entered. Since the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 are provided so as to intersect each other, each of the bridge drive units 514 and 524 uses the first bridge 512 and the second bridge 522 as the game board 31. It is possible to switch to the hold state by projecting against. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 70 is a front view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a variable winning device 5, and the variable winning device 5 includes a first bridge 512 and a second bridge 522.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the game board 31D includes a variable winning device 5D, and the variable winning device 5D includes a moving bridge 55, which is different from that of the first embodiment. different.

FIG. 71 is a front view of the variable winning device. In FIG. 71, the vertically upward direction is defined as the + Z-axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to the Z-axis are described as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
As shown in FIG. 71, the variable winning device 5D is provided below the lower operating port 37. The variable winning device 5D includes a first winning opening 51D provided on the left side of the game area and a second winning opening 52D provided on the right side of the game area.
The player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 5D by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.

Here, the game board 31D includes a panel 53 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 5D. The panel 53 is formed to be transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 5D can be visually recognized from the front side.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 5D from the front through the panel 53.

The first winning opening 51D is provided in the opening 311 formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The first winning opening 51D is provided so as to open to the right, and inside the cover 511 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and the cover 511 which guides the game ball entered through the opening to the opening 311. In addition to being provided, it also includes the above-mentioned detection sensor 40c that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
The game ball that is guided by the cover 511 and enters the opening 311 is discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 311a. The game ball passing through the discharge passage 311a joins the game ball discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 5) of the out port 39.

The second winning opening 52D is provided in the opening 312 formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The second winning opening 52D is provided so as to open to the left, and inside the cover 521 and the cover 521 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that guides the game ball entered through the opening to the opening 312. In addition to being provided, the above-mentioned detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball is provided. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
The game ball that is guided by the cover 521 and enters the opening 312 is discharged from the game area via the discharge passage 312a. The game ball passing through the discharge passage 312a joins the game ball discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 5) of the out port 39 in the same manner as the game ball passing through the discharge passage 311a. Become.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first prize opening 51D functions as a small prize ball winning opening for paying out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of the prize balls when the game ball is entered. The second winning opening 52D functions as a multi-prize ball winning opening for paying out a larger number (15 in this embodiment) of winning balls than the first winning opening 51D when the game ball is entered.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 51D is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction (+ X-axis direction side). The second winning opening 52D is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction (-X-axis direction side).
Further, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D function as a ball entering means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area.

Further, the variable winning device 5D includes a substantially triangular columnar moving bridge 55 provided between the cover 511 and the cover 521.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of a variable winning device in a state where the moving bridge is moved to the left side. Specifically, FIG. 72 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5D seen from the upper surface side, and FIG. 72 (B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5D. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of a variable winning device in a state where the moving bridge is moved to the right side. Specifically, FIG. 73 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5D seen from the upper surface side, and FIG. 73 (B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5D.

As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the moving bridge 55 has a substantially triangular columnar moving bridge main body 551 provided between the cover 511 and the cover 521, and an L-shape attached to the back side of the moving bridge main body 551. The arm 552 and the bridge drive unit 553 that drives the moving bridge main body 551 via the arm 552 are provided.

The moving bridge main body 551 is formed in a substantially triangular columnar shape as a whole. The moving bridge main body 551 has a first guide surface 551a that inclines so as to descend from the central position toward the cover 511 side, and a first guide surface 551a that inclines so as to descend from the central position toward the cover 521 side. It is provided with a guide surface 551b of 2.
The arm 552 is provided so as to connect the back surface portion of the moving bridge main body 551 and the shaft body of the bridge drive portion 553 via an elongated hole 318 formed in the game board 31D.

The bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551 along the X-axis direction by moving the shaft body forward and backward along the X-axis direction.
Specifically, as shown by the left arrow in FIG. 72, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge body 551 toward the −X axis direction by advancing the shaft body along the X-axis direction. (Left movement state).
Since the moving bridge main body 551 includes a first guide surface 551a that inclines so as to descend from its central position toward the cover 511 side, the cover 511 and the cover 511 can be moved in the −X axis direction. A game ball flowing down the game area between the lower operating ports 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 511 (see the downward arrow in FIG. 72 (B)).

Further, as shown by the right-pointing arrow in FIG. 73, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge body 551 toward the + X-axis direction by retracting the shaft body along the X-axis direction (right-moving state). ).
Since the moving bridge main body 551 includes a second guide surface 551b that inclines so as to descend from its central position toward the cover 521 side, the cover 521 and the lower portion are moved in the + X-axis direction. A game ball flowing down the game area between the operating ports 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 521 (see the downward arrow in FIG. 73 (B)).

In this way, the first winning opening 51D is in an open state in which the moving bridge main body 551 is moved in the −X axis direction to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511, and the moving bridge main body 551 is directed in the + X axis direction. It has a closed state in which the game ball is moved to the out port 39.
Then, the bridge drive unit 553 sets the first winning opening 51D to either the open state or the closed state by driving the moving bridge main body 551.

Further, the second winning opening 52D is in an open state in which the moving bridge main body 551 is moved in the + X-axis direction to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 521, and the moving bridge main body 551 is moved in the −X-axis direction. It has a closed state in which the game ball is led to the out port 39.
Then, the bridge drive unit 553 sets the second winning opening 52D to either the open state or the closed state by driving the moving bridge main body 551.

Here, as shown in FIG. 71, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551 to the center of the cover 511 and the cover 521 by driving the moving bridge main body 551, and causes the first winning opening 51D and the first winning opening 51D and the first winning opening 51D. Both the winning openings 52D of 2 can be set to the closed state (center movement state).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the moving bridge main body 551 functions as a bridge provided between the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D. Further, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551 along the horizontal direction.
In other words, the moving bridge body 551 functions as a switching derivative composed of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening 51D or the second winning opening 52D.
Further, the bridge drive unit 553 functions as a switching derivative drive unit that integrally drives the moving bridge main body 551.
Then, in the present embodiment, the first guide surface 551a is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51D side, and the second guide surface 551b is directed toward the second winning opening 52D side. It is tilted so that it descends accordingly.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
In the first embodiment, the output port of the MPU 62 is a second, which causes an electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 and a first bridge 512 of the variable winning device 5 to be retracted. The bridge drive unit 514 of No. 1, the second bridge drive unit 524 for retracting the second bridge 522 of the variable winning device 5, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 were connected to each other. ..
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the output port of the MPU 62 is a movement of the electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 and the variable winning device 5D. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is connected to the bridge drive unit 553 that moves the bridge body 551, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric accessory open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the bridge drive unit 553 to move the moving bridge main body 551. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening opening / closing process and the large winning opening opening process are different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the large winning opening opening / closing process and the large winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1010D instead of the process of step S1010, and executes the process of step S1018D instead of the process of step S1018. 1 Different from the embodiment.

In step S1010D and step S1018D, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 moves the moving bridge main body 551 to the center of the cover 511 and the cover 521 by executing the drive control of the bridge drive unit 553, and causes the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 51D and the second winning opening. Both 52D are set to the closed state.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1109D. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1108D instead of the process of step S1108, and executes the process of step S1109D instead of the process of step S1109. 1 Different from the embodiment.

In step S1108D, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the first winning opening. In the opening execution process of the first winning opening, the MPU 62 moves the moving bridge main body 551 toward the −X axis direction by executing the drive control of the bridge drive unit 553, and is in the first left moving state. The winning opening 51D is set to the open state.
Further, in step S1109D, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the second winning opening. In the opening execution process of the second winning opening, the MPU 62 moves the moving bridge main body 551 toward the + X axis direction by executing the drive control of the bridge driving unit 553, and sets the second winning state as a right moving state. Set the mouth 52D to the open state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the moving bridge main body 551 and the bridge drive unit 553 do not allow the game ball to enter the first winning opening 51D and do not allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 52D. (Left movement state) and second entry-possible state (right movement) in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52D and the game ball is not inserted into the first winning opening 51D. The state) and the non-entry state (center movement state) in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D are switched, and the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 51D are switched. It functions as a ball entry state switching means provided between the winning openings 52D.

Specifically, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge body 551 to the first winning opening 51D side, so that the game ball enters the first winning opening 51D via the first guide surface 551a. By switching to the first winning state and moving the moving bridge body 551 to the second winning opening 52D side, the game ball is entered into the second winning opening 52D via the second guide surface 551b. By switching to the second winning state where the ball can be entered and moving the moving bridge main body 551 to the center of the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D, the ball cannot be entered.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry-possible state by the ball-entry state switching means, and opens / closes. If the mode has not been changed, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the ball entry impossible state.
Specifically, the main control device 60 performs a prize ball determination process (ball entry possible) for selecting either a small prize ball (first ball entry possible state) or a multi-prize ball (second ball entry possible state). (State selection unit) and when a small prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the first ball-entry state, and the prize ball determination process selects a multi-prize ball. If this is the case, the ball entry state switching means is provided with a large winning opening opening process (ball entry enable state switching unit) for switching to the second ball entry enable state.

Here, in the prize ball determination process, a lottery for selecting either a small prize ball or a multi-prize ball is executed based on a predetermined probability (50% in the present embodiment).
In the present embodiment, the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. , Any method may be adopted as long as one of the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state is selected. For example, the ball-entry state selection unit is in the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state according to the type and expectation of the reach display leading to the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. You may choose either one.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable winning device 5D is provided with a ball-entry state switching means, when the open / close execution mode is entered, the variable winning device 5D is predetermined by switching to the first ball-entry-possible state by the ball-entry state switching means. A game ball can be entered into the first winning opening 51D that executes the payout of a number of prize balls, and by switching to the second winning state by the entry state switching means, the first winning opening A game ball can be inserted into the second winning opening 52D, which pays out more prize balls than the 51D. Further, when the variable winning device 5D has not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the variable winning device 5D is switched to the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D by switching to the non-entry state by the winning state switching means. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device 5D shifts to the open / close execution mode, the number of prize balls can be changed by switching the ball-entry state switching means by the ball-entry state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of.

(2) Since the moving bridge main body 551 is composed of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening 51D or the second winning opening 52D, the bridge drive unit 553 can enter the first ball. In the state and the second winning state, the game ball is not guided to both the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D.
(3) The first winning opening 51D is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the second winning opening 52D is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction. The state switching means causes the game ball to enter the first winning opening 51D or the second winning opening 52D by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and left-right directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

(4) When the small prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball entry enable state by the ball entry state switching means, and the prize ball determination process multi-prize. When a ball is selected, the player is aware of the selection result of the prize ball determination process because it is provided with a large prize opening opening process for switching to the second ball-entry state by the ball entry state switching means. Therefore, it is expected that the second ball can be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(5) Since the prize ball determination process executes a lottery to select either the first ball-entry state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability, the player determines the prize ball. We will pay attention to the lottery result of the processing, and expect that the second ball can be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) Since the first guide surface 551a is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51D, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge body 551 to the first winning opening 51D side. By allowing the game ball to enter the first winning opening 51D via the first guide surface 551a, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state. Since the second guide surface 551b is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52D side, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge body 551 to the second winning opening 52D side. , It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52D via the second guide surface 551b. Further, since the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit 553 has the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D. By moving the moving bridge main body 551 to the center of the ball, it is possible to switch to the non-entry state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can diversify the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) Since the upper surface portion of the covers 511 and 521 has a shape protruding toward the opening direction from the lower surface portion of the covers 511, 521, the upper surface portion of the covers 511, 521 is projected from the lower surface portion of the covers 511, 521. Compared with the case where the shape does not protrude toward the opening direction, the game ball is less likely to erroneously win a prize in the first winning opening 51D or the second winning opening 52D.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of the variable winning device according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 77, the vertically upward direction is defined as the + Z axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to the Z axis are referred to as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
In the fifth embodiment, the game board 31D includes a variable winning device 5D, and the variable winning device 5D includes a substantially triangular columnar moving bridge 55 provided between the cover 511 and the cover 521.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31E includes a variable winning device 5E, and the variable winning device 5E includes a substantially semi-elliptical columnar moving bridge 55E provided between the cover 511 and the cover 521. It differs from the fifth embodiment in that it is present.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of the variable winning device. Specifically, FIG. 78 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5E seen from the upper surface side, and FIG. 78 (B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5E.
As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the moving bridge 55E has a substantially semi-elliptical columnar moving bridge body 551E provided between the cover 511 and the cover 521, and an L-shape attached to the back side of the moving bridge body 551E. An arm 552E, a bridge drive unit 553 that drives the moving bridge body 551E via the arm 552E, a substantially rectangular plate-shaped first guide plate 554 provided at the upper right position of the moving bridge body 551E, and a moving bridge. It is provided with a substantially rectangular plate-shaped second guide plate 555 provided at the upper left position of the main body 551E, and a link mechanism 556 attached to the back side of the first guide plate 554 and the second guide plate 555. ..

The moving bridge body 551E is formed in a substantially semi-elliptical columnar shape as a whole. The moving bridge main body 551E has an upper surface that is curved and inclined so as to descend from the central position toward each of the cover 511 side and the cover 521 side.
The arm 552E is provided so as to connect the back surface portion of the moving bridge main body 551E and the shaft body of the bridge drive portion 553 via an elongated hole 318 formed in the game board 31E. The arm 552E has a rack gear 552E1 formed on a surface on the −Y axis direction side.
The bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge body 551E along the X-axis direction by moving the shaft body forward and backward along the X-axis direction.

The first guide plate 554 is provided so as to be retractable through a hole 318a having a substantially rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31E, and is located at the center of the upper surface of the moving bridge body 551E from the upper end of the cover 521. It is provided so as to descend toward.
Here, the game board 31E is provided so as to cover the first guide plate 554 around the Y axis, and includes a guide portion 31E1 that guides the first guide plate 554 along the Y axis direction. The first guide plate 554 is guided by the guide portion 31E1 and is recessed through the hole 318a having a substantially rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31E.

The second guide plate 555 is provided so as to be retractable through a hole 318b having a substantially rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31E, and is located at the center of the upper surface of the moving bridge body 551E from the upper end of the cover 511. It is provided so as to descend toward.
Here, the game board 31E is provided so as to cover the second guide plate 555 around the Y axis, and also includes a guide portion 31E2 that guides the second guide plate 555 along the Y axis direction. The second guide plate 555 is guided by the guide portion 31E2 and is recessed through the hole 318b having a substantially rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31E.

The link mechanism 556 is fixed to the rotation shafts of the pinion gears 556a1 to 556a3, which are aligned with the rack gear 552E1 of the arm 552E, and the pinion gears 556a3, and rotates with the rotating arm 556b which rotates around the Z axis as the pinion gear 556a3 rotates. A first arm 556c rotatably attached to the + X-axis direction end of the arm 556b and a second arm 556d rotatably attached to the -X-axis direction end of the rotary arm 556b. I have.

The first arm 556c has one end rotatably attached to the back surface of the first guide plate 554 around the Z axis, and the other end rotatably attached to the end of the rotary arm 556b around the Z axis. There is.
The second arm 556d has one end rotatably attached to the back surface of the second guide plate 555 around the Z axis, and the other end rotatably attached to the end of the rotary arm 556b around the Z axis. There is.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of a variable winning device in a state where the moving bridge is moved to the left side. Specifically, FIG. 79 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5E seen from the upper surface side, and FIG. 79 (B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5E. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of a variable winning device in a state where the moving bridge is moved to the right side. Specifically, FIG. 80 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5E seen from the upper surface side, and FIG. 80 (B) is a front view of the variable winning device 5E.

As shown by the left-pointing arrow in FIG. 79, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge body 551E toward the -X-axis direction by advancing the shaft body along the -X-axis direction (left-moving state). ).
Since the moving bridge body 551E has an upper surface that is curved and inclined so as to descend from the central position toward each of the cover 511 side and the cover 521 side, the moving bridge main body 551E is provided by moving it in the −X axis direction. , A game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the lower actuating opening 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 511 (see arrow A in FIG. 79 (B)).

Further, when the moving bridge main body 551E is moved in the −X axis direction, the rotating arm 556b moves the first arm 556c in the + Y axis direction via the rack gear 552E1 of the arm 552E and the pinion gears 556a1 to 556a3. The first guide plate 554 protrudes from the game board 31E through the hole 318a formed in the game board 31E. According to this, the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 521 and the lower operating port 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 511 via the first guide plate 554 and the moving bridge main body 551E (FIG. 79 (Fig. 79). B) See arrow B).

Further, as shown by the right-pointing arrow in FIG. 80, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge body 551E toward the + X-axis direction by advancing the shaft body along the + X-axis direction (right-moving state). ).
Since the moving bridge main body 551E has an upper surface that is curved and inclined so as to descend from the central position toward each of the cover 511 side and the cover 521 side, the moving bridge main body 551E is moved in the + X axis direction. A game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 521 and the lower operating port 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 521 (see arrow A in FIG. 80 (B)).

Further, when the moving bridge main body 551E is moved in the + X axis direction, the rotating arm 556b moves the second arm 556d in the + Y axis direction via the rack gear 552E1 of the arm 552E and the pinion gears 556a1 to 556a3. Therefore, the second guide plate 555 protrudes from the game board 31E through the hole 318b formed in the game board 31E. According to this, the game ball flowing down the game area between the cover 511 and the lower operating port 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 521 via the second guide plate 555 and the moving bridge main body 551E (FIG. 80 (Fig. 80). B) See arrow B).

As described above, the first winning opening 51D is in an open state in which the moving bridge main body 551E is moved in the −X axis direction to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511, and the moving bridge main body 551E is covered 511 and the cover 521. It has a closed state (see FIG. 78) in which the game ball is moved to the center of the door and is guided to the out port 39.
Then, the bridge drive unit 553 sets the first winning opening 51D to either the open state or the closed state by driving the moving bridge main body 551E.

Further, the second winning opening 52D is in an open state in which the moving bridge main body 551E is moved in the + X-axis direction to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 521, and the moving bridge main body 551 is placed in the center of the cover 511 and the cover 521. It has a closed state (see FIG. 78) in which the game ball is moved and guided to the out port 39.
Then, the bridge drive unit 553 sets the second winning opening 52D to either the open state or the closed state by driving the moving bridge main body 551E.

Here, as shown in FIG. 78, the bridge drive unit 553 moves the moving bridge main body 551E to the center of the cover 511 and the cover 521 by driving the moving bridge main body 551E, and the first guide plate 554 and the first guide plate 554 and the first guide plate 551. Both the guide plates 555 of 2 can be immersed in the game board 31E.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the moving bridge main body 551E has an upper surface that is curved and inclined so as to descend from the central position toward each of the cover 511 side and the cover 521 side. Therefore, the cover 511 The curved surface on the side functions as a first guide surface that inclines so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51D side, and the curved surface on the cover 521 side descends toward the second winning opening 52D side. It functions as a second guide surface that inclines so as to do so.
Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entry state switching means is directed toward the first guide plate 554 that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface and toward the first guide surface. It is provided with a second guide plate 555 that guides the falling game ball to the second guide surface.

Then, in the present embodiment, the bridge drive unit 555 projects the first guide plate 554 with respect to the game board 31E and immerses the second guide plate 555 with respect to the game board 31E. Switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51D via the guide plate 554 and the first guide surface, and the second guide plate 555 protrudes from the game board 31E. By immersing the first guide plate 554 in the game board 31E, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52D via the second guide plate 555 and the second guide surface. By switching to the ball-entry state of 2 and immersing the first guide plate 554 and the second guide plate 555 into the game board 31E, the ball-entry state is switched to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball-entry state switching means causes the first guide plate 554 to protrude from the game board 31E by moving the moving bridge main body 551E to the first winning opening 51D side, and at the same time, the first guide plate 554 is projected from the game board 31E. By immersing the guide plate 555 of 2 in the game board 31E and moving the moving bridge main body 551E to the side of the second winning opening 52D, the second guide plate 555 is projected from the game board 31E, and at the same time. A link mechanism 556 for immersing the first guide plate 554 in the game board 31E is provided.

According to the present embodiment as described above, in addition to being able to exert the same actions and effects as those of the fifth embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the first guide plate 554 guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, the bridge drive unit 553 uses the first guide plate 554 on the game board 31E. By projecting against the ball, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51D via the first guide plate 554 and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate 555 guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the bridge drive unit 555 projects the second guide plate 555 with respect to the game board 31E. By allowing the game ball to enter the second winning opening 52D via the second guide plate 555 and the second guide surface, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state. Further, since the first winning opening 51D and the second winning opening 52D are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit 553 includes the first guide plate 554 and the second guide plate 555. Can be switched to the non-entry state by immersing the player in the game board 31E. Therefore, the ball-entry state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate 554 in the first ball-entry state. In the second ball-entry state, the game ball falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate 555.

(2) The ball entry state switching means includes a link mechanism 556 that interlocks and retracts the first guide plate 554 and the second guide plate 555 by moving the moving bridge main body 551E. It is possible to eliminate the need for a power source such as an actuator or an actuator.

[7th Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a variable winning device 5, and the variable winning device 5 includes a first bridge 512 and a second bridge 522.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the game board 31F includes a variable winning device 5F, and the variable winning device 5F includes an elevating bridge 56, which is different from that of the first embodiment. different.

FIG. 82 is a front view of the variable winning device. In FIG. 82, the vertically upward direction is defined as the + Z axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to the Z axis are referred to as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
As shown in FIG. 82, the variable winning device 5F is provided below the lower operating port 37. The variable winning device 5F includes a first winning opening 51F provided on the left side of the game area and a second winning opening 52F provided below the first winning opening 51F.
The player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 5F by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.

Here, the game board 31F includes a panel 53 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 5F. The panel 53 is formed to be transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 5F can be visually recognized from the front side.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 5F from the front through the panel 53.

The first winning opening 51F is provided in the opening 311F formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The first winning opening 51F is provided so as to open to the right, and inside the cover 511F and the cover 511F having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that guides the game ball entered through the opening to the opening 311F. In addition to being provided, it also includes the above-mentioned detection sensor 40c that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
The game ball that is guided by the cover 511F and enters the opening 311F is discharged from the game area via the discharge passage 311b. The game ball passing through the discharge passage 311b joins the game ball discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 5) of the out port 39.

The second winning opening 52F is provided in the opening 312F formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The second winning opening 52F is provided so as to open to the right, and inside the cover 521F and the cover 521F having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that guides the game ball entered through the opening to the opening 312F. In addition to being provided, the above-mentioned detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball is provided. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
The game ball guided by the cover 521F and entering the opening 312F is discharged from the game area via the discharge passage 312b. The game ball passing through the discharge passage 312b joins the game ball discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 5) of the out port 39 in the same manner as the game ball passing through the discharge passage 311b. Become.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first prize opening 51F functions as a small prize ball winning opening for paying out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of the prize balls when the game ball is entered. The second winning opening 52F functions as a multi-prize ball winning opening for paying out a larger number (15 in this embodiment) of winning balls than the first winning opening 51F when the game ball is entered.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 51F is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction (+ X-axis direction side). The second winning opening 52F is provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the first winning opening 51F and is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction (+ X-axis direction side).
Further, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F function as a ball entering means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area.

Further, the variable winning device 5F includes an elevating bridge 56 provided on the right side of the cover 511F and the cover 521F.

FIG. 83 is a front view showing a detailed configuration of the variable winning device.
As shown in FIG. 83, the elevating bridge 56 includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped elevating plate 561 provided on the right side of the cover 511F, a rectangular plate-shaped fixing plate 562 provided on the right side of the elevating plate 561, and an elevating plate. It includes a bridge drive unit 563 that drives 561.

The elevating plate 561 is provided so as to be inclined so as to descend toward the cover 511F side. The elevating plate 561 has a shaft portion 561a that pivotally supports an end portion on the + X axis direction side so as to be rotatable around the Y axis. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 83, the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the elevating plate 561 will fall along the upper surface of the elevating plate 561 from the left side of the cover 511F.
The fixing plate 562 is provided so as to be inclined so as to descend toward the cover 511F side. Further, the left end portion of the fixing plate 562 is provided so as to communicate with the right end portion of the elevating plate 561. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the fixed plate 562 will fall from the left side of the cover 511F along the upper surface of the elevating plate 561 and the upper surface of the cover 511F.
The bridge drive unit 563 includes a shaft body connected to the shaft portion 561a of the elevating plate 561, and by rotating this shaft body around the Y axis, the elevating plate 561 is moved around the Y axis via the shaft portion 561a. Rotate.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of a variable winning device in a state where the elevating bridge is rotated. Specifically, FIG. 84 (A) is a front view of the variable winning device 5F in a state where the elevating bridge 56 is lowered to the first winning opening 51F, and FIG. 84 (B) shows the elevating bridge 56. It is a front view of the variable winning apparatus 5F in the state which was lowered to the winning opening 52F of 2.

As shown in FIG. 84A, the bridge drive unit 563 rotates the shaft body around the Y-axis to rotate the elevating plate 561 around the Y-axis via the shaft portion 561a. Lower to the winning opening 51F (first ascending / descending state).
Since the elevating plate 561 is inclined so as to descend toward the lower end of the cover 511F, the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the elevating plate 561 and the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the fixed plate 562 are guided to the opening of the cover 511F. (See FIG. 84 (A) down arrow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 84B, the bridge drive unit 563 rotates the elevating plate 561 about the Y axis via the shaft portion 561a by rotating the shaft body around the Y axis. It is lowered to the winning opening 52F of 2 (second ascending / descending state).
Since the elevating plate 561 is inclined so as to descend toward the lower end of the cover 521F, the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the elevating plate 561 and the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the fixed plate 562 are guided to the opening of the cover 521F. (See FIG. 84 (B) down arrow).

In this way, the first winning opening 51F is in an open state in which the elevating plate 561 is lowered to the first winning opening 51F to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511F, and the elevating plate 561 is raised to out the game ball. It has a closed state (see FIG. 83) leading to the mouth 39.
Then, the bridge drive unit 563 sets the first winning opening 51F to either an open state or a closed state by driving the elevating plate 561.

Further, the second winning opening 52F is in an open state in which the elevating plate 561 is lowered to the second winning opening 52F to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 521F, and the elevating plate 561 is raised to bring out the game ball to the out opening 39. It has a closed state (see FIG. 83) leading to.
Then, the bridge drive unit 563 sets the second winning opening 52F to either an open state or a closed state by driving the elevating plate 561.

Here, as shown in FIG. 83, the bridge drive unit 563 raises the elevating plate 561 by driving the elevating plate 561 to close both the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F. It can be set (third ascending / descending state).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the elevating bridge 56 functions as a bridge provided on one side in the horizontal direction of the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F. Further, the bridge drive unit 563 raises and lowers the elevating bridge 56.
In other words, the elevating bridge 56 functions as a switching derivative composed of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening 51F or the second winning opening 52F.
Further, the bridge drive unit 563 functions as a switching derivative drive unit that integrally drives the elevating bridge 56.
Then, in the present embodiment, the elevating bridge 56 is tilted so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51F, and the first elevating state for guiding the game ball to the first winning opening 51F and the second elevating state. The second ascending / descending state in which the game ball is guided to the second winning opening 52F by inclining so as to descend toward the winning opening 52F, and the game ball to the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F. It has a third ascending / descending state that does not lead to.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
In the first embodiment, the output port of the MPU 62 is a second, which causes an electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 and a first bridge 512 of the variable winning device 5 to be retracted. The bridge drive unit 514 of No. 1, the second bridge drive unit 524 for retracting the second bridge 522 of the variable winning device 5, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 were connected to each other. ..
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85, the output port of the MPU 62 is the electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37, and the variable winning device 5F is raised and lowered. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is connected to the bridge drive unit 563 that rotates the plate 561, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric accessory open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the bridge drive unit 563 to rotate the elevating plate 561. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening opening / closing process and the large winning opening opening process are different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the large winning opening opening / closing process and the large winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1010F instead of the process of step S1010, and executes the process of step S1018F instead of the process of step S1018. 1 Different from the embodiment.

In step S1010F and step S1018F, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 raises the elevating plate 561 by executing the drive control of the bridge drive unit 563 to set both the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F in the closed state.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1109F. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1108F instead of the process of step S1108, and executes the process of step S1109F instead of the process of step S1109. 1 Different from the embodiment.

In step S1108F, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the first winning opening. In the opening execution process of the first winning opening, the MPU 62 lowers the elevating plate 561 to the first winning opening 51F by executing the drive control of the bridge drive unit 563, and sets the first lowering state as the first lowering state. The winning opening 51F is set to the open state.
Further, in step S1109F, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the second winning opening. In the opening execution process of the second winning opening, the MPU 62 lowers the elevating plate 561 to the second winning opening 52F by executing the drive control of the bridge drive unit 563, and sets it as the second lowering state. The winning opening 52F is set to the open state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the elevating plate 561 and the bridge drive unit 563 are in the first ball-entry state (first elevating state) in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51F, and the second elevating state. The game ball is not allowed to enter either the second winning opening 51F or the second winning opening 52F in the second winning state (second elevating state) in which the game ball is inserted into the winning opening 52F. It functions as a ball entry state switching means for switching between a ball entry impossible state (third ascending / descending state).

Specifically, the bridge drive unit 563 sets the elevating bridge 56 to the first elevating state, so that the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51F via the elevating bridge 56. By switching to the enable state and setting the elevating bridge 56 to the second elevating state, the game ball can be entered into the second winning opening 52F via the elevating bridge 56, and the game ball can be entered into the second winning state. By setting the bridge 56 to the third ascending / descending state, the ball cannot enter the ball.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry-possible state by the ball-entry state switching means, and opens / closes. If the mode has not been changed, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the ball entry impossible state.
Specifically, the main control device 60 performs a prize ball determination process (ball entry possible) for selecting either a small prize ball (first ball entry possible state) or a multi-prize ball (second ball entry possible state). (State selection unit) and when a small prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the first ball-entry state, and the prize ball determination process selects a multi-prize ball. If this is the case, the ball entry state switching means is provided with a large winning opening opening process (ball entry enable state switching unit) for switching to the second ball entry enable state.

Here, in the prize ball determination process, a lottery for selecting either a small prize ball or a multi-prize ball is executed based on a predetermined probability (50% in the present embodiment).
In the present embodiment, the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. , Any method may be adopted as long as one of the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state is selected. For example, the ball-entry state selection unit is in the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state according to the type and expectation of the reach display leading to the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. You may choose either one.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable winning device 5F is provided with a ball-entry state switching means, when the open / close execution mode is entered, the variable winning device 5F is predetermined by switching to the first ball-entry-possible state by the ball-entry state switching means. A game ball can be entered into the first winning opening 51F for paying out a number of prize balls, and by switching to the second winning state by the entry state switching means, the first winning opening A game ball can be inserted into the second winning opening 52F, which pays out more prize balls than the 51F. Further, when the variable winning device 5F has not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the variable winning device 5F is switched to the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F by switching to the non-entry state by the winning state switching means. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device 5F shifts to the open / close execution mode, the number of prize balls can be changed by switching the ball-entry state switching means by the ball-entry state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of.

(2) Since the elevating bridge 56 is composed of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening 51F or the second winning opening 52F, the bridge drive unit 563 is in a state where the first winning opening is possible. And in the second winning state, the game ball is not guided to both the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F.

(3) When the small prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball entry enable state by the ball entry state switching means, and the prize ball determination process multi-prize. When a ball is selected, the player is aware of the selection result of the prize ball determination process because it is provided with a large prize opening opening process for switching to the second ball-entry state by the ball entry state switching means. Therefore, it is expected that the second ball can be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(4) Since the prize ball determination process executes a lottery to select either the first ball-entry state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability, the player determines the prize ball. We will pay attention to the lottery result of the processing, and expect that the second ball can be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) The pachinko machine 10 has a first ball-entry state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51F and a second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52F. And, since both the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F are provided with a ball entry state switching means for switching between a ball entry state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter and a ball entry state switching means, the game ball flowing down the game area. It is possible to diversify the movement of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.
(6) The first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F are provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction. The second winning opening 52F is provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the first winning opening 51F. Therefore, since the directions of the game balls flowing down to enter the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F are the same, the first winning state or the second winning state switching means can be used. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the game ball enters the first winning opening 51F or the second winning opening 52F when the ball is switched to the ball-entry state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) In the first elevating state, the elevating bridge 56 is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51F, and guides the game ball to the first winning opening 51F. Therefore, the bridge drive unit 563 By setting the elevating bridge 56 to the first elevating state, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51F via the elevating bridge 56. In the second elevating state, the elevating bridge 56 is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52F, and guides the game ball to the second winning opening 52F. Therefore, the bridge drive unit 563 moves up and down. By setting the bridge 56 to the second elevating state, it is possible to switch to the second advancing state in which the game ball is admitted to the second winning opening 52F via the elevating bridge 56. Further, since the elevating bridge 56 does not guide the game ball to the first winning opening 51F and the second winning opening 52F in the third elevating state, the bridge drive unit 563 raises the elevating bridge 56 to the third elevating state. By setting to, it is possible to switch to the non-entry state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

[8th Embodiment]
Hereinafter, an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a variable winning device 5, and the variable winning device 5 includes a first bridge 512 and a second bridge 522.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, the game board 31G is provided with the variable winning device 5G, and the variable winning device 5G is provided with the upper and lower bridges 57. different.

FIG. 89 is a front view of the variable winning device. In FIG. 89, the vertically upward direction is defined as the + Z axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to the Z axis are described as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
As shown in FIG. 89, the variable winning device 5G is provided below the lower operating port 37. The variable winning device 5G includes a first winning opening 51G provided on the left side of the game area and a second winning opening 52G provided below the first winning opening 51G.
The player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 5G by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.

Here, the game board 31G includes a panel 53 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 5G. The panel 53 is formed to be transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 5G can be visually recognized from the front side.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 5G from the front through the panel 53.

The first winning opening 51G is provided in the opening 311G formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The first winning opening 51G is provided so as to open to the right, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 511G for guiding the game ball entered through the opening to the opening 311G, and inside the cover 511G. In addition to being provided, it also includes the above-mentioned detection sensor 40c that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
The game ball that is guided by the cover 511G and enters the opening 311G is discharged from the game area via the discharge passage 311c. The game ball passing through the discharge passage 311c joins the game ball discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 90) of the out port 39.

The second winning opening 52G is provided in the opening 312G formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The second winning opening 52G is provided so as to open to the right, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped cover 521G for guiding the game ball entered through the opening to the opening 312G, and inside the cover 521G. In addition to being provided, the above-mentioned detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball is provided. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of prize balls based on the detection result.
The game ball that is guided by the cover 521G and enters the opening 312G is discharged from the game area via the discharge passage 312c. The game ball passing through the discharge passage 312c joins the game ball discharged from the game area through the discharge passage 39a (see FIG. 90) of the out port 39 in the same manner as the game ball passing through the discharge passage 311c. Become.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first prize opening 51G functions as a small prize ball winning opening for paying out a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of the prize balls when the game ball is entered. The second prize opening 52G functions as a multi-prize ball winning opening for paying out a larger number (15 in this embodiment) of the prize balls than the first winning opening 51G when the game ball is entered.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 51G is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction (+ X-axis direction side). The second winning opening 52G is provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the first winning opening 51G and is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction (+ X-axis direction side).
Further, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 51G and the second winning opening 52G function as a ball entering means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area.

In the first embodiment, the upper surface portion of the cover 521 has a shape protruding toward the cover 511 side (opening direction side) from the lower surface portion of the cover 521.
On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the upper surface portion of the cover 521G does not have a shape protruding toward the opening direction from the lower surface portion of the cover 521G.

Further, the variable winning device 5G includes an upper and lower bridge 57 provided on the right side of the cover 511G and the cover 521G.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of the variable winning device. Specifically, FIG. 90 (A) is a front view of the variable winning device 5G, and FIG. 90 (B) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5G as viewed from the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the upper and lower bridges 57 are provided on the right side of the cover 521G so as to be parallel to the substantially rectangular plate-shaped upper bridge 571 provided on the right side of the cover 511G and the upper bridge 571. A substantially rectangular plate-shaped lower bridge 572, a bridge drive unit 573 that drives the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 57 2 (see FIG. 90B), and a link attached to the back side of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572. It is equipped with a mechanism 574 (see FIG. 90 (B)).

The upper bridge 571 is provided so as to be retractable through a hole 319a having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31G, and is provided so as to be inclined so as to descend toward the lower end portion of the cover 511G. ..
Here, the game board 31G is provided so as to cover the upper bridge 571 around the Y axis, and also includes a guide portion 31G1 (see FIG. 90 (B)) that guides the upper bridge 571 along the Y axis direction. .. The upper bridge 571 is guided by the guide portion 31G1 and is projected through the hole 319a having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31G.

The lower bridge 572 is provided so as to be retractable through a hole 319b having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31G, and is provided so as to be inclined so as to descend toward the lower end portion of the cover 521G. ..
Here, the game board 31G is provided so as to cover the lower bridge 572 around the Y axis, and also includes a guide portion 31G2 (see FIG. 90 (B)) that guides the lower bridge 572 along the Y axis direction. .. The lower bridge 572 is guided by the guide portion 31G2 and is recessed through the hole 319b having a rectangular cross section formed in the game board 31G.

The bridge drive unit 573 drives the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 via the link mechanism 574 by rotating the shaft body around the X axis.
The link mechanism 574 is fixed to the shaft body of the bridge drive unit 573, and has a rotating arm 574a that rotates around the X axis as the shaft body rotates, and an end portion of the rotating arm 574a on the + Z axis direction side. A first arm 574b rotatably attached to the rotary arm 574b and a second arm 574c rotatably attached to the end of the rotary arm 574a on the −Z axis direction are provided.

One end of the first arm 574b is rotatably attached to the back surface of the upper bridge 571 around the X axis, and the other end of the first arm 574b is rotatably attached to the end of the rotary arm 574a around the X axis.
One end of the second arm 574c is rotatably attached to the back surface of the lower bridge 572 around the X axis, and the other end of the second arm 574c is rotatably attached to the end of the rotating arm 574a around the X axis.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of a variable winning device in a state where the upper bridge is projected. Specifically, FIG. 91 (A) is a front view of the variable winning device 5G, and FIG. 91 (B) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5G as viewed from the right side. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of a variable winning device in a state where the lower bridge is projected. Specifically, FIG. 92A is a front view of the variable winning device 5G, and FIG. 92B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 5G as viewed from the right side.

The bridge drive unit 573 projects the upper bridge 571 from the game board 31G through the hole 319a formed in the game board 31G by rotating the shaft body counterclockwise in the drawing about the X axis (upper). Protruding state). Specifically, when the shaft body of the bridge drive unit 573 is rotated counterclockwise in the drawing about the X axis, the rotating arm 574a moves the first arm 574b in the + Y axis direction. Therefore, the upper bridge 571 protrudes from the game board 31G through the hole 319a formed in the game board 31G. According to this, the game ball flowing down the game areas on both the left and right sides of the lower operating port 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 511G (see the arrow in FIG. 91 (A)).

Here, the protrusion width D1 of the upper bridge 571 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the distance D2 between the game board 31G and the panel 53. In other words, the protrusion width D1 of the upper bridge 571 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball.
In the present embodiment, the protrusion width D1 of the upper bridge 571 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but even if it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. Often, it may be set to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the bridge drive unit 573 projects the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G through the hole 319b formed in the game board 31G by rotating the shaft body clockwise in the drawing about the X axis ( Downward protrusion). Specifically, when the shaft body of the bridge drive unit 573 is rotated clockwise around the X-axis, the rotating arm 574a moves the second arm 574c in the + Y-axis direction. Therefore, the lower bridge 572 protrudes from the game board 31G through the hole 319b formed in the game board 31G. According to this, the game ball flowing down the game areas on both the left and right sides of the lower operating port 37 can be guided to the opening of the cover 521G (see the arrow in FIG. 92 (A)).

Here, the protrusion width D1 of the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the distance D2 between the game board 31G and the panel 53. In other words, the protrusion width D1 of the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball.
In the present embodiment, the protrusion width D1 of the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but even if it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball Often, it may be set to be wider than the diameter of the game ball.

As described above, the first winning opening 51G is in an open state in which the upper bridge 571 is projected from the game board 31G through the hole 319a formed in the game board 31G to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 511G, and the upper bridge. It has a closed state (see FIG. 90) in which the 571 is immersed in the game board 31G through a hole 319a formed in the game board 31G to guide the game ball to the out port 39 (see FIG. 90).
Then, the bridge drive unit 573 sets the first winning opening 51G to either the open state or the closed state by driving the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572.

Further, the second winning opening 52G has an open state in which the lower bridge 572 is projected from the game board 31G through a hole 319b formed in the game board 31G to guide the game ball to the opening of the cover 521G, and the lower bridge 572. It has a closed state (see FIG. 90) in which the game board 31G is immersed in the game board 31G through a hole 319b formed in the game board 31G to guide the game ball to the out port 39.
Then, the bridge drive unit 573 sets the second winning opening 52G to either the open state or the closed state by driving the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572.

Here, as shown in FIG. 90, the bridge drive unit 573 drives the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to immerse both the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 into the game board 31G, and the first winning opening. Both the 51G and the second winning opening 52G can be set to the closed state (immersive state).

As described above, the protrusion width D1 of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, and therefore, for example, the same width as the diameter of the game ball. The upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31G as compared with the case where is set to.
According to this, the bridge drive unit 573 opens the cover 511G at the upper bridge 571 immediately after setting the first winning opening 51G in the closed state and immediately before setting the first winning opening 51G in the closed state. It is possible to suppress the over-winning that causes the guided game ball to be won in the first winning opening 51G.
Further, the bridge drive unit 573 led the cover 521G to the opening of the cover 521G by the lower bridge 572 immediately after the second winning opening 52G was set to the closed state and immediately before the second winning opening 52G was set to the closed state. It is possible to suppress over-winning that causes the game ball to win in the second winning opening 52G.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper bridge 571 is provided as a first bridge that is retractably provided with respect to the game board 31G and is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51G side. The lower bridge 572 functions as a second bridge that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board 31G and that is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52G side. Further, the bridge drive unit 573 causes the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to be recessed with respect to the game board 31G.

In other words, the upper bridge 571 functions as a first derivative that guides the game ball to the first winning opening 51G.
Then, the bridge drive unit 573 sets the upper bridge 571 to be effective (open state) by projecting the upper bridge 571 with respect to the game board 31G, and immerses the upper bridge 571 with respect to the game board 31G. , The upper bridge 571 is set to invalid (closed state).

Further, the lower bridge 572 functions as a second derivative that guides the game ball to the second winning opening 52G.
Then, the bridge drive unit 573 sets the lower bridge 572 to be effective (open state) by projecting the lower bridge 572 with respect to the game board 31G, and immerses the lower bridge 572 with respect to the game board 31G. , The lower bridge 572 is set to invalid (closed state).

Then, the bridge drive unit 573 switches between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-possible state, and the ball-impossible state by switching the validity / invalidity of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572, and the first In both the ball-entry state and the second ball-possible state, both the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 cannot be effectively set.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
In the first embodiment, the output port of the MPU 62 is a second, which causes an electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 and a first bridge 512 of the variable winning device 5 to be retracted. The bridge drive unit 514 of No. 1, the second bridge drive unit 524 for retracting the second bridge 522 of the variable winning device 5, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 were connected to each other. ..
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, the output port of the MPU 62 is above the electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 and the variable winning device 5G. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is connected to a bridge drive unit 573 that causes the bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to retract, a main display unit 45, and an accessory display unit 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric accessory open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the bridge drive unit 573 to cause the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to sink. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening opening / closing process and the large winning opening opening process are different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the large winning opening opening / closing process and the large winning opening opening process in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1024. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1010G instead of the process of step S1010, and executes the process of step S1018G instead of the process of step S1018. 1 Different from the embodiment.

In step S1010G and step S1018G, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the bridge drive unit 573 to immerse both the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 into the game board 31G, and the first winning opening 51G and the second winning opening Both 52G are set to the closed state.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1109G. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1108G instead of the process of step S1108, and executes the process of step S1109G instead of the process of step S1109. 1 Different from the embodiment.

In step S1108G, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the first winning opening. In the opening execution process of the first winning opening, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the bridge drive unit 573 to project the upper bridge 571 from the game board 31G to bring the first winning opening 51G into an upward protruding state. Set to the open state.
Further, in step S1109F, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the second winning opening. In the opening execution process of the second winning opening, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the bridge drive unit 573 to project the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G to bring the second winning opening 52G into a downward protruding state. Set to the open state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper bridge 571, the lower bridge 572, and the bridge drive unit 573 are in the first ball-entry state (upward protruding state) in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51G. , A game ball is inserted into both the first winning opening 51G and the second winning opening 52G in the second winning state (downward protruding state) in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52G. It functions as a ball entry state switching means for switching between a ball entry impossible state (immersive state) and a ball entry state switching means.

Specifically, the bridge drive unit 573 projects the upper bridge 571 with respect to the game board 31G and immerses the lower bridge 572 with respect to the game board 31G, whereby the first prize is won through the upper bridge 571. By switching to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the mouth 51G, the lower bridge 572 is projected from the game board 31G, and the upper bridge 571 is immersed in the game board 31G, thereby lowering the bridge. By switching to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52G via 572 and immersing the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 in the game board 31G, the ball cannot be entered. I have switched to.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry-possible state by the ball-entry state switching means, and opens / closes. If the mode has not been changed, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the ball entry impossible state.
Specifically, the main control device 60 performs a prize ball determination process (ball entry possible) for selecting either a small prize ball (first ball entry possible state) or a multi-prize ball (second ball entry possible state). (State selection unit) and when a small prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process, the ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the first ball-entry state, and the prize ball determination process selects a multi-prize ball. If this is the case, the ball entry state switching means is provided with a large winning opening opening process (ball entry enable state switching unit) for switching to the second ball entry enable state.

Here, in the prize ball determination process, a lottery for selecting either a small prize ball or a multi-prize ball is executed based on a predetermined probability (50% in the present embodiment).
In the present embodiment, the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. , Any method may be adopted as long as one of the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state is selected. For example, the ball-entry state selection unit is in the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state according to the type and expectation of the reach display leading to the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. You may choose either one.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the variable winning device 5G is provided with a ball-entry state switching means, when the open / close execution mode is entered, the variable winning device 5G is predetermined by switching to the first ball-entry-possible state by the ball-entry state switching means. A game ball can be entered into the first winning opening 51G that executes the payout of a number of prize balls, and by switching to the second winning state by the entry state switching means, the first winning opening A game ball can be inserted into the second winning opening 52G, which pays out more prize balls than 51G. Further, when the variable winning device 5G has not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the variable winning opening 51G and the second winning opening 52G are switched to the non-entry state by the winning state switching means. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device 5G shifts to the open / close execution mode, the number of prize balls can be changed by switching the ball-entry state switching means by the ball-entry state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of.

(2) When the small prize ball is selected in the prize ball determination process, the main control device 60 switches to the first ball entry enable state by the ball entry state switching means, and the prize ball determination process multi-prize. When a ball is selected, the player is aware of the selection result of the prize ball determination process because it is provided with a large prize opening opening process for switching to the second ball-entry state by the ball entry state switching means. Therefore, it is expected that the second ball can be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(3) Since the prize ball determination process executes a lottery to select either the first ball-entry state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability, the player determines the prize ball. We will pay attention to the lottery result of the processing, and expect that the second ball can be entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The pachinko machine 10 has a first ball-entry state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51G and a second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52G. And, since both the first winning opening 51G and the second winning opening 52G are provided with a ball-entry state switching means for switching between a ball-impairing state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter, the game ball flowing down the game area It is possible to diversify the movement of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.
(5) The first winning opening 51G and the second winning opening 52G are provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction. The second winning opening 52G is provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the first winning opening 51G. Therefore, since the directions of the game balls flowing down to enter the first winning opening 51G and the second winning opening 52G are the same, the first winning state or the second winning state switching means can be used. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the game ball enters the first winning opening 51G or the second winning opening 52G when the ball is switched to the entry-capable state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) Since the upper bridge 571 is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening 51G side, the bridge drive unit 573 projects the upper bridge 571 with respect to the game board 31G, so that the upper bridge 571 is inclined. It is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening 51G via 571. Since the lower bridge 572 is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening 52G side, the bridge drive unit 573 passes the lower bridge 572 to the game board 31G via the lower bridge 572. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening 52G. Further, since the first winning opening 51G and the second winning opening 52G are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit 573 sets the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 to the game board 31G. By immersing yourself in the ball, you can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

(7) Since the protrusion width D1 of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 from the game board 31G is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, it is set to the same width as the diameter of the game ball. The upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 can be quickly immersed in the game board 31G. Therefore, immediately after the upper bridge 571 or the lower bridge 572 is immersed in the game board 31G, the bridge drive unit 573 uses the upper bridge 571 or the lower bridge 572 to make the first winning opening 51G or the second winning opening 52G. It is possible to suppress an over-winning that causes the game ball that has been led to the first winning opening 51G or the second winning opening 52G to win a prize.
(8) Since the upper surface portion of the cover 511G has a shape that protrudes toward the opening direction from the lower surface portion of the cover 511G, the upper surface portion of the cover 511G does not protrude toward the opening direction side from the lower surface portion of the cover 511G. As compared with the case where, the game ball is less likely to mistakenly win a prize in the first winning opening 51G or the second winning opening 52G.

In the present embodiment, the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 57 2 allow the game ball to fall in the protruding direction side of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572.
On the other hand, at least one of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 prevents the game ball from falling toward the protruding direction side of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572, as in the modified example of the first embodiment. It may be provided with a fall prevention unit.

According to this, at least one of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572 is provided with a fall prevention portion for preventing the game ball from falling toward the projecting direction side of the upper bridge 571 and the lower bridge 572. The game ball can be reliably inserted into at least one of the winning opening 51G and the second winning opening 52G.

[Variation example of each embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to each of the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the range in which the object of the present invention can be achieved are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 50 once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the large winning opening 50 a plurality of times in one round game.
(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the large winning opening 50 is set to the open state, a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or the large winning opening 50 is reached. When the total number of winning balls reaches a predetermined upper limit, the large winning opening 50 is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the large winning opening 50 to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the large winning opening 50 is set to the open state, the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 is increased to eight, which is a predetermined upper limit. By reaching it, the grand prize opening 50 was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, the upper limit number may be set to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number depending on the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number for each round in one opening / closing execution mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the large winning opening 50 to the open state, and then the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 reaches a predetermined upper limit. The grand prize opening 50 was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger for setting the large winning opening 50 to the closed state when the game ball enters, and this is achieved by the elapse of a predetermined time. It may be configured to allow entry into the end trigger.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 reopens the large winning opening 50 when a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses after the large winning opening 50 is set to the open state. It was set to a closed state. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, for example, after the large winning opening 50 is set to the open state, a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning of the large winning opening 50 occurs, so that the large winning opening 50 is opened. 50 may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the large winning opening 50 in the open state and then sets the large winning opening 50 in the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the large winning opening 50 to the open state and then shift to the next round game without setting the large winning opening 50 to the closed state again. ..
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and is n times or less (any of n = 1, 2, 3) of the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed twice in the upper limit duration of the short-time mode and an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times in the upper limit duration of the long-term mode. Had had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from these in terms of the mode of the upper limit duration and the number of times the round game is executed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the degree of opening of the large winning opening 50 is different, such as half-open or full-open, instead of the configuration in which a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set by different aspects of the upper limit duration. Depending on the configuration, a plurality of types of open / close execution modes may be set. Further, the mode of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different although it looks the same to the player.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game result and the effect for the open / close execution mode are set in advance so as to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the open / close execution mode may be randomly selected and set from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, and may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. And the selection rate may be different depending on the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is one of "special deviation result", "unspecified small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result". The information related to the special symbol combination was determined as the stop result to be finally displayed on the line L, and the special symbol combination was the same regardless of the type of the game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result is.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for generating jackpots, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery of the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result" and a "normal deviation result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of a random number that wins the jackpot occurrence. By comparing the winning / failing table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the lottery for generating jackpots was executed. In other words, the MPU 62 executed the lottery related to the "special deviation result" by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in order to execute the lottery related to the "special deviation result", thereby causing the "special deviation". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is two under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and the jackpot occurs. Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special out-of-order result" was set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of "special deviation result" may be set to be lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and is set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may have been done. Further, the probability of becoming a "special deviation result" may be set to be 0 in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the state, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and holds the lower operating port 37 and the first winning opening 51B. By storing the information in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, the holding information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 and the first winning opening 51B were stored separately. .. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 and the first winning opening 51B together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially gives priority to the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 and the first winning opening 51B regardless of whether or not there is holding information related to the upper operating port 36. It was set for digestion. On the other hand, the MPU 62 sets the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 and the first winning opening 51B for the digestion of the game times in the winning order of the holding information. You may.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 90, and the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. Control of the display control device 100 was being executed. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the voice emission control device 90 to control the voice emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments and are arbitrary. ..
(18) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 determines the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, or the first winning opening 51B. By starting the variable display of the symbol so as to scroll periodically in the direction, the effect for the game round is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for the game round is not limited to the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating the movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 to 31G in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 to 31G in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for playing games by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 47.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win / fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on winning a prize in the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, or the first winning opening 51B. After that, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 execute the variable display, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, or the first winning opening 51B is won. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on was displayed. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the variable display is started. The result of may be displayed. In this case, after the variable display is started and before the variable display is stopped, the internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes a variable display of a pattern and displays the result of an internal lottery as a stop result of the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the variable display, and by displaying the stop result at random, the inside The result of the lottery may not be identifiable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display unit 45.

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 determines the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, or the first winning opening 51B. By starting the variable display of the symbol so as to scroll periodically in the direction, the effect for the game round is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute the effect for the game round on the display screen G by displaying the symbol (design) that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 47 sets a predetermined region in at least one of a region narrower than the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the peripheral region of the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or may be hidden during the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, as the pattern to be displayed in the predetermined area, characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify may be adopted, or a combination thereof may be adopted. Further, it may be difficult for the player to identify by adopting characters, colors, or patterns that are not easily identified by the player but are similar to each other or a combination thereof. According to this, for example, at the end of the game round, the manager of the pachinko / pachislot machine may win the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by visually observing the symbol display device 47 without visually observing the main display unit 45. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior.

(23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. .. For example, the gaming machine is configured so that the player can output the optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and the information of the optical code is transmitted to the camera provided on the mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured so that the information of the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing the image, reading the image, and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player entering the password issued by accessing the website into the gaming machine by operating the buttons provided on the gaming machine. You may.

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been illustrated and described as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a gaming ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or another type of gaming machine such as a sparrow ball.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described. Among the features of the present invention group, the configurations corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above-mentioned respective embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are characterized. Deformations, improvements, etc. within the range in which the object can be achieved, and combinations of each feature are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. It is advantageous for the player based on the results of the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. A game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and a variable winning device (main control device 60) that shifts the game ball to a state in which the game ball can enter when the specific control state is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) equipped with a variable winning device 5).
The variable winning device is
A small prize ball winning opening (first winning opening 51, 51D, 51F, 51G) that executes a predetermined number of prize balls when entering a game ball, and
A multi-prize ball winning opening (second winning opening 52, 52D, 52F, 52G) that pays out more prize balls than the small prize ball winning opening when entering a game ball, and
The game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening, the first ball is not allowed to enter the multi-prize ball winning opening, and the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening. At the same time, a second ball-entry state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the small prize ball winning opening, and a ball incapable of entering the game ball in neither the small prize ball winning opening nor the multi-prize ball winning opening. Equipped with a ball entry state switching means to switch between states
When the gaming state transition means shifts to the specific control state, the ball entry state switching means switches to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state, and the specific control state A gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry state switching means switches to the ball-incapable state when the player has not shifted to.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, since the variable winning device includes the ball-entry state switching means, when the specific control state is entered, the first ball-entry state can be entered by the ball-entry state switching means. By switching to, it is possible to insert a game ball into the small prize ball winning opening that executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and by switching to the second ball-entry state by the ball entry state switching means, A game ball can be inserted into a multi-prize ball winning opening that pays out more prize balls than a small prize ball winning opening. In addition, when the variable winning device has not shifted to the specific control state, the variable winning device switches the ball to the non-entry state by the ball entry state switching means, so that the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the number of winning balls can be changed by switching the ball-entry state switching means by the ball-entry state switching means. The degree of attention can be improved.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means
A ball-fillable state selection unit (prize ball determination process) for selecting either the first ball-fillable state or the second ball-fillable state, and
When the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching means switches to the first ball-entry state and the ball-entry state selection unit is used. When the second ball-entry state is selected in the above, the ball-entry state switching unit (large winning opening opening process) for switching to the second ball-entry state by the ball-entry state switching means is used. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, when the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the game state transition means is the first ball-entry state switching means. When the ball is switched to the possible state and the second ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching unit is used to switch to the second ball-entry state switching unit. Since the player is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-entry-possible state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry-possible state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. ..

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the ball-entry state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-entry state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The small prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the multi-prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A first bridge (first bridge 512) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the prize ball winning opening side.
A second bridge (second bridge 522) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the winning opening side of the multi-prize ball.
It is provided with a bridge drive unit (first bridge drive unit 514 and second bridge drive unit 524) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to be recessed with respect to the game board.
The bridge driving unit projects the first bridge with respect to the gaming board and immerses the second bridge with respect to the gaming board, whereby the small prize is awarded through the first bridge. The game ball is inserted into the ball winning opening. The state is switched to the first ball-entry state, the second bridge is projected from the game board, and the first bridge is immersed in the game board. By allowing the game ball to enter the multi-prize ball winning opening via the second bridge, the game is switched to the second ball-entry state, and the first bridge and the second bridge are moved to the game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is switched to the above-mentioned non-entry state by immersing it in the board.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, since the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the prize ball winning opening side, the bridge drive unit projects the first bridge with respect to the game board. By making the ball enter, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the first bridge. Since the second bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the winning opening side of the multi-prize ball, the bridge drive unit passes through the second bridge by projecting the second bridge with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening. Further, since the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit immerses the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board. By making it possible, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.
Further, since the small prize ball winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the multi-prize ball winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. By allocating the game balls in the horizontal and horizontal directions, the ball is entered into the small prize ball winning opening or the multi-prize ball winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A4 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect with each other.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, since the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect, when they are provided so as not to intersect (for example, offset in the vertical direction). The ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area, as compared with the case where the ball entry state switching means is provided.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The small prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the multi-prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A bridge (moving bridge main body 551) provided between the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening, and
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 553) for moving the bridge in the horizontal direction is provided.
The bridge
A first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that inclines so as to descend toward the winning opening side of the small prize ball, and
It is provided with a second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) that is inclined so as to descend toward the winning opening side of the multi-prize ball.
The bridge drive unit moves the bridge toward the prize ball winning opening, so that the game ball is inserted into the prize ball winning opening via the first guide surface. By switching to the possible state and moving the bridge to the multi-prize ball winning opening side, the second ball can be entered by inserting the game ball into the multi-prize ball winning opening via the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized in that the state is switched and the bridge is moved to the center of the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening to switch to the non-entry state.

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the prize ball winning opening side, so that the bridge drive unit moves the bridge to the prize ball winning opening side. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side, the bridge drive unit moves the bridge toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side to move the second guide surface toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening. Further, since the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit has a bridge in the center of the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening. By moving it, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.
Further, since the small prize ball winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the multi-prize ball winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. By allocating the game balls in the horizontal and horizontal directions, the ball is entered into the small prize ball winning opening or the multi-prize ball winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A6 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
A first guide plate (first guide plate 554) that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, and
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) for guiding the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface is provided.
The bridge drive unit projects the first guide plate with respect to the game board and immerses the second guide plate with respect to the game board, thereby causing the first guide plate and the first guide plate to be immersed in the game board. It is switched to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening through the guide surface of 1, the second guide plate is projected from the game board, and the first ball is inserted. By immersing the guide plate 1 in the game board, the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized in that the first guide plate and the second guide plate are immersed in the gaming board to switch to the ball-capable state, thereby switching to the ball-impossible state.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the first guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, so that the bridge drive unit uses the first guide plate. By projecting from the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the bridge drive unit causes the second guide plate to project with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. Further, since the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit attaches the first guide plate and the second guide plate to the game board. By immersing yourself in the ball, you can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the ball entry state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball entry enable state. In the second ball-entry state, the game ball falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The small prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the multi-prize ball winning opening provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the small prize ball winning opening and also provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A first bridge (upper bridge 571) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the winning opening side of the small prize ball.
A second bridge (lower bridge 572) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the winning opening side of the multi-prize ball.
It is provided with a bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 573) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to sink into the game board.
The bridge driving unit projects the first bridge with respect to the gaming board and immerses the second bridge with respect to the gaming board, whereby the small prize is awarded through the first bridge. The game ball is inserted into the ball winning opening. The state is switched to the first ball-entry state, the second bridge is projected from the game board, and the first bridge is immersed in the game board. By allowing the game ball to enter the multi-prize ball winning opening via the second bridge, the game is switched to the second ball-entry state, and the first bridge and the second bridge are moved to the game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is switched to the above-mentioned non-entry state by immersing it in the board.

According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, since the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the prize ball winning opening side, the bridge drive unit projects the first bridge with respect to the game board. By making the ball enter, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the first bridge. Since the second bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the winning opening side of the multi-prize ball, the bridge drive unit passes through the second bridge by projecting the second bridge with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening. Further, since the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit immerses the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board. By letting the ball enter, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The small prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the multi-prize ball winning opening provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the small prize ball winning opening and also provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
An elevating bridge (elevating bridge 56) provided on one side in the horizontal direction of the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening, and
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 563) for raising and lowering the elevating bridge is provided.
The elevating bridge
The first ascending / descending state in which the game ball is guided to the small prize ball winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the small prize ball winning opening side.
A second ascending / descending state in which the game ball is guided to the multi-prize ball winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side.
A third ascending / descending state in which a game ball is not guided to the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening is provided.
By setting the elevating bridge to the first elevating state, the bridge driving unit is in the first advancing state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the elevating bridge. By switching and setting the elevating bridge to the second elevating state, the elevating bridge is switched to the second elevating state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening via the elevating bridge. A gaming machine characterized in that the bridge is set to the third elevating state to switch to the inaccessible state.

According to the feature A9 of the present invention group, in the first ascending / descending state, the elevating bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the small prize ball winning opening side, and thus guides the game ball to the small prize ball winning opening. By setting the elevating bridge to the first elevating state, the bridge drive unit can switch to the first advancing state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the elevating bridge. In the second ascending / descending state, the elevating bridge inclines so as to descend toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side to guide the game ball to the multi-prize ball winning opening. By setting the elevating state, it is possible to switch to the second advancing state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening via the elevating bridge. Further, since the elevating bridge does not guide the game ball to the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening in the third elevating state, the bridge drive unit sets the elevating bridge to the third elevating state. , You can switch to the state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The small prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the multi-prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided between the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening, and
A bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) for rotating the bridge is provided.
The bridge
The first rotation state (left rotation state) in which the game ball is guided to the small prize ball winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the small prize ball winning opening side.
It is provided with a second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is guided to the multi-prize ball winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side.
By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge driving unit switches to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the bridge. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the bridge is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening via the bridge. Amusement machine.

According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the small prize ball winning opening side, and thus guides the game ball to the small prize ball winning opening. By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge driving unit can switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the bridge. In the second rotating state, the bridge inclines so as to descend toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side to guide the game ball to the multi-prize ball winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit makes the bridge a second. By setting the rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening via the bridge. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.
Further, since the small prize ball winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the multi-prize ball winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. By allocating the game balls in the horizontal and horizontal directions, the ball is entered into the small prize ball winning opening or the multi-prize ball winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A10 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
The bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board, and
The bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543 and advance / retreat drive unit 544) that rotates the bridge after the bridge is recessed with respect to the game board and the bridge is projected from the game board. With and
The bridge
A first rotating state (left-handed rotating state) that guides the game ball to the small prize ball winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the small prize ball winning opening side after projecting from the game board. )When,
A second rotating state (right-handed rotating state) that guides the game ball to the multi-prize ball winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side after projecting with respect to the game board. ) And
The bridge drive unit projects the bridge with respect to the game board, and then sets the bridge in the first rotating state, so that the game ball enters the prize ball winning opening via the bridge. Is switched to the first ball-entry state, the bridge is projected from the game board, and then the bridge is set to the second rotation state, thereby passing through the bridge. It is characterized in that it switches to the second ball-entry state in which a game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening, and switches to the ball-incapable state by immersing the bridge in the game board. Amusement machine.

According to the feature A11 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge protrudes with respect to the game board and then tilts so as to descend toward the prize ball winning opening side. Since the game ball is guided to the winning opening, the bridge drive unit can set the bridge to the first rotating state so that the game ball can be inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the bridge. You can switch to the state. In the second rotating state, the bridge projects from the game board and then inclines so as to descend toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side to guide the game ball to the multi-prize ball winning opening. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the drive unit can switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening via the bridge. Further, since the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit is in a state where the ball cannot be entered by immersing the bridge in the game board. Can be switched to. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can prevent the flow path of the game ball from being obstructed when the ball is switched to the non-entry state.

Feature A12.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A10 of the present invention group,
The bridge drive unit is characterized in that the bridge is rotated so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the small prize ball winning opening or the multi-prize ball winning opening, thereby switching to the non-entry state. A game machine to be.

According to the feature A12 of the present invention group, the bridge drive unit rotates the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the small prize ball winning opening or the multi-prize ball winning opening, so that the ball cannot be entered. Can be switched to. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can switch the bridge to the non-entry state without adding a new structure.

According to the feature A group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device executes a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls are entered, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. It is advantageous for the player based on the results of the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. The game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and the state in which the game ball can enter when the specific control state is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) equipped with a variable winning device (variable winning device 5A).
The normal control state is
The first gaming state (low probability mode) and
A second gaming state (high probability mode) different from the first gaming state is provided.
The variable winning device is
A normal winning opening (first winning opening 51) that pays out a predetermined number of winning balls when a game ball is entered, and
A specific winning opening (second winning opening 52A) that sets the normal control state to the second gaming state when the game ball is entered, and
A first ball-entry state in which a game ball is inserted into the normal winning opening and the game ball is not inserted into the specific winning opening, and a game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening, and the normal winning opening is inserted. It is provided with a ball-entry state switching means for switching between a second ball-entry state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the ball and a ball-incapable state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter either the normal winning opening or the specific winning opening. ,
When the gaming state transition means shifts to the specific control state, the ball entry state switching means switches to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state, and the specific control state A gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry state switching means switches to the ball-incapable state when the player has not shifted to.

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, since the variable winning device includes the ball-entry state switching means, when the specific control state is entered, the first ball-entry state can be entered by the ball-entry state switching means. By switching to, the game ball can be put into the normal winning opening that executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and by switching to the second winning state by the ball-entry state switching means, the normal control A game ball can be inserted into a specific winning opening whose state is set to the second game state. In addition, the variable winning device does not allow the game ball to enter the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening by switching to the non-entry state by the ball entry state switching means when the specific control state has not been entered. Can be. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the normal control state can be set to the second gaming state by switching the ball-entry possible state by the ball-entry state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means, it is determined whether or not the entry state switching means switches to the second entry possible state. The ball entry status determination section (large winning opening opening process) and
When the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening in the specific control state, the normal control state is set to the first gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific winning opening, the above-mentioned A gaming machine including a gaming state setting unit (transition process at the end of open / close execution mode) that sets a normal control state to the second gaming state.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is the second ball entry state switching means based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Since it is provided with a ball entry state determination unit that determines whether or not to switch to the ball entry ready state, the player pays attention to the determination result of the ball entry state determination unit, and the second ball entry enable state. You would expect it to be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 or feature B2 of the present invention group
The ball-entry state switching means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second ball-entry state is switched to the first ball-entry state when the game ball enters the specific winning opening.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, the ball-entry state switching means switches the second ball-possible state to the first ball-possible state when the game ball enters the specific winning opening. A person can insert a game ball into a specific winning opening and then insert a game ball into a normal winning opening. Then, the normal winning opening can execute a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls are entered. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The normal winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the specific winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A first bridge (first bridge 512) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side.
A second bridge (second bridge 522) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side.
It is provided with a bridge drive unit (first bridge drive unit 514 and second bridge drive unit 524) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to be recessed with respect to the game board.
The bridge driving unit projects the first bridge with respect to the gaming board and immerses the second bridge with respect to the gaming board, whereby the normal winning is won through the first bridge. Switching to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the mouth, the second bridge is projected from the game board, and the first bridge is immersed in the game board. To switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening via the second bridge, and the first bridge and the second bridge are attached to the game board. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the above-mentioned non-entry state by immersing it.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, since the first bridge usually inclines so as to descend toward the winning opening side, the bridge drive unit projects the first bridge with respect to the game board. As a result, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is normally inserted into the winning opening via the first bridge. Since the second bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side, the bridge drive unit is identified via the second bridge by projecting the second bridge with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the winning opening. Further, since the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit immerses the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board. You can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.
Further, since the normal winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the specific winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means is a game ball. By allocating the ball horizontally and horizontally, the ball will be entered into the normal winning opening or the specific winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B4 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect with each other.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, since the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect, when they are provided so as not to intersect (for example, offset in the vertical direction). The ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area, as compared with the case where the ball entry state switching means is provided.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The normal winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the specific winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A bridge (moving bridge main body 551) provided between the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening, and
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 553) for moving the bridge in the horizontal direction is provided.
The bridge
A first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that inclines so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side, and
It is provided with a second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) that is inclined so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side.
By moving the bridge to the normal winning opening side, the bridge driving unit switches to the first entry-capable state in which the game ball is inserted into the normal winning opening via the first guide surface. By moving the bridge to the specific winning opening side, the ball is switched to the second winning state in which the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening via the second guide surface, and the normal winning opening is switched to. A gaming machine characterized in that the bridge is moved to the center of the specific winning opening to switch to the non-entry state.

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side, so that the bridge drive unit moves the bridge to the normal winning opening side. It is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is normally inserted into the winning opening through the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side, the bridge drive unit moves the bridge to the specific winning opening side to perform the specific winning through the second guide surface. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the mouth. Further, since the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit cannot enter the ball by moving the bridge to the center of the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening. You can switch to the state. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.
Further, since the normal winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the specific winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means is a game ball. By allocating the ball horizontally and horizontally, the ball will be entered into the normal winning opening or the specific winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B6 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
A first guide plate (first guide plate 554) that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, and
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) for guiding the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface is provided.
The bridge drive unit projects the first guide plate with respect to the game board and immerses the second guide plate with respect to the game board, whereby the first guide plate and the first guide plate are immersed. It is switched to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the normal winning opening through the guide surface of 1, the second guide plate is projected from the game board, and the first ball is inserted. By immersing the guide plate in the game board, the second guide plate and the second guide surface allow the game ball to enter the specific winning opening. A gaming machine characterized in that the first guide plate and the second guide plate are immersed in the gaming board to switch to the non-entry state.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the first guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, so that the bridge drive unit uses the first guide plate. By projecting from the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is normally inserted into the winning opening through the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the bridge drive unit causes the second guide plate to project with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. Further, since the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit immerses the first guide plate and the second guide plate in the game board. Can be switched to the non-entry state. Therefore, the ball entry state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball entry enable state. In the second ball-entry state, the game ball falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The normal winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the specific winning opening provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the normal winning opening and also provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A first bridge (upper bridge 571) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side.
A second bridge (lower bridge 572) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side.
It is provided with a bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 573) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to sink into the game board.
The bridge driving unit projects the first bridge with respect to the gaming board and immerses the second bridge with respect to the gaming board, whereby the normal winning is won through the first bridge. Switching to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the mouth, the second bridge is projected from the game board, and the first bridge is immersed in the game board. To switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening via the second bridge, and the first bridge and the second bridge are attached to the game board. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the above-mentioned non-entry state by immersing it.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, since the first bridge usually inclines so as to descend toward the winning opening side, the bridge drive unit projects the first bridge with respect to the game board. As a result, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is normally inserted into the winning opening via the first bridge. Since the second bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side, the bridge drive unit is identified via the second bridge by projecting the second bridge with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the winning opening. Further, since the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit immerses the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board. You can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The normal winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the specific winning opening provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the normal winning opening and also provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
An elevating bridge (elevating bridge 56) provided on one side of the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening in the horizontal direction,
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 563) for raising and lowering the elevating bridge is provided.
The elevating bridge
The first ascending / descending state in which the game ball is guided to the normal winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side.
A second ascending / descending state in which the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side.
It is provided with a normal winning opening and a third ascending / descending state in which a game ball is not guided to the specific winning opening.
By setting the elevating bridge to the first elevating state, the bridge drive unit switches to the first advancing state in which the gaming ball is inserted into the normal winning opening via the elevating bridge. By setting the elevating bridge to the second elevating state, the elevating bridge is switched to the second elevating state in which the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening via the elevating bridge, and the elevating bridge is set to the second elevating state. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the above-mentioned non-entry state by setting the elevating state of 3.

According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, in the first ascending / descending state, the elevating bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side to guide the game ball to the normal winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit is By setting the elevating bridge to the first elevating state, it is possible to switch to the first advancing state in which the game ball is normally inserted into the winning opening via the elevating bridge. In the second elevating state, the elevating bridge inclines so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side to guide the game ball to the specific winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit puts the elevating bridge into the second elevating state. By setting, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening via the elevating bridge. Further, since the elevating bridge does not guide the game ball to the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening in the third elevating state, the bridge drive unit cannot enter the ball by setting the elevating bridge to the third elevating state. You can switch to the state. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The normal winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the specific winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided between the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening, and
A bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) for rotating the bridge is provided.
The bridge
The first rotation state (left rotation state) in which the game ball is guided to the normal winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side, and
It is provided with a second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side.
By setting the bridge in the first rotating state, the bridge driving unit switches to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the normal winning opening via the bridge. A gaming machine characterized in that by setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the gaming ball is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the gaming ball is inserted into the specific winning opening via the bridge.

According to the feature B10 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side to guide the game ball to the normal winning opening, so that the bridge driving unit is By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is normally inserted into the winning opening via the bridge. In the second rotating state, the bridge inclines so as to descend toward the specific winning opening and guides the game ball to the specific winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit puts the bridge in the second rotating state. By setting, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening via the bridge. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.
Further, since the normal winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the specific winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means is a game ball. By allocating the ball horizontally and horizontally, the ball will be entered into the normal winning opening or the specific winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature B11.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B10 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
The bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board, and
The bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543 and advance / retreat drive unit 544) that rotates the bridge after the bridge is recessed with respect to the game board and the bridge is projected from the game board. With and
The bridge
A first rotation state (left rotation state) in which the game ball is guided to the normal winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side after projecting from the game board.
It is provided with a second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side after projecting from the game board. ,
The bridge driving unit projects the bridge with respect to the gaming board, and then sets the bridge in the first rotating state, so that the gaming ball is inserted into the normal winning opening via the bridge. By switching to the first ball-entry state to make the ball ball, projecting the bridge with respect to the game board, and then setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the identification is performed via the bridge. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the second ball-entry state in which a game ball is inserted into a winning opening, and switching to the ball-incapable state by immersing the bridge in the game board.

According to the feature B11 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge protrudes from the game board and then inclines so as to descend toward the normal winning opening side to play the game in the normal winning opening. Since the ball is guided, the bridge drive unit can switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is normally inserted into the winning opening through the bridge by setting the bridge in the first rotation state. .. In the second rotating state, the bridge projects from the game board and then inclines so as to descend toward the specific winning opening side to guide the game ball to the specific winning opening. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening via the bridge. Further, since the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit can switch to the non-entry state by immersing the bridge in the game board. it can. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can prevent the flow path of the game ball from being obstructed when the ball is switched to the non-entry state.

Feature B12.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B10 of the present invention group,
The bridge driving unit is characterized in that the bridge is rotated so as not to allow the gaming ball to enter either the normal winning opening or the specific winning opening, thereby switching to the non-entry state. ..

According to the feature B12 of the present invention group, the bridge drive unit can switch to the non-entry state by rotating the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the normal winning opening or the specific winning opening. it can. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can switch the bridge to the non-entry state without adding a new structure.

According to the feature B group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device has a monotonous function of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls when the game balls are entered, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered. ..

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is drawn when the game ball enters. For the player, based on the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and the first winning opening 51B) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. A game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state to an advantageous specific control state (open / close execution mode), and a variable winning state that shifts the game ball to a state in which the game ball can enter when the specific control state is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) equipped with a device (variable winning device 5B).
The variable winning device is
It is equipped with a large winning opening (second winning opening 52B) that pays out a predetermined number of winning balls when entering a game ball.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (first winning opening 51B) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine
A first ball-entry state in which a game ball is inserted into the second start ball entry portion, a second ball entry-possible state in which a game ball is inserted into the large winning opening, and a second start ball entry portion. And any of the above-mentioned large winning openings is provided with a ball-entry state switching means for switching between a ball-impaired state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter.
When the second starting ball entry portion is set to the open state, the gaming state transition means switches to the first ball entry enable state by the ball entry state switching means, and shifts to the specific control state. In this case, when the second ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the second ball entry enable state and the second start ball entry portion is set to the closed state, or when the specific control state has not been entered. Is a gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry state switching means switches to the ball-incapable state.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, since the gaming machine is provided with the ball entry state switching means, when the second start ball entry portion is set to the open state, the ball entry state switching means is used for the first. By switching to the ball-entry state, the game ball can be entered into the second starting ball entry section that executes an internal lottery when the game ball is entered. Further, since the gaming machine is provided with the ball entry state switching means, when the specific control state is entered, the game ball can be inserted by switching to the second ball entry enable state by the ball entry state switching means. A game ball can be inserted into a large winning opening for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, when the second starting ball entry portion is set to the closed state and when the gaming machine has not shifted to the specific control state, the gaming machine switches to the ball entry impossible state by the ball entry state switching means. 2 It is possible to prevent the pachinko ball from entering the starting ball entry section and the large winning opening. Therefore, the gaming machine can guide the gaming ball to different winning openings by switching the entering possible state by the entering state switching means, so that the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine
The second starting ball entry portion provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with the large winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A first bridge (first bridge 512B) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball entry portion side.
A second bridge (second bridge 522B) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the large winning opening side.
It is provided with a bridge drive unit (first bridge drive unit 514B and second bridge drive unit 524B) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to sink into the game board.
The bridge driving unit causes the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry unit via the first bridge by projecting the first bridge with respect to the game board. By switching to the ball-enabled state and projecting the second bridge with respect to the game board, the game ball is inserted into the grand prize opening via the second bridge. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first bridge and the second bridge are immersed in the gaming board to switch to the non-entering state.

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball entry side, so that the bridge driving unit makes the first bridge with respect to the game board. By projecting the ball, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second starting ball-entry portion via the first bridge. Since the second bridge inclines so as to descend toward the winning opening side, the bridge drive unit is large via the second bridge by projecting the second bridge with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the winning opening. Further, since the second starting ball entry portion and the large winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive portion immerses the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board. By doing so, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.
Further, since the second starting ball entry portion is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the large winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means can be used. , By distributing the game ball in the horizontal and horizontal directions, the ball is entered into the second starting ball entry section or the large winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect with each other.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, since the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect each other, when they are provided so as not to intersect each other (for example, offset in the vertical direction). The ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area, as compared with the case where the ball entry state switching means is provided.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C3 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the horizontal length of the first bridge is shorter than the horizontal length of the second bridge.

Here, in general, the opening time of the second starting ball opening portion for executing the internal lottery when the game ball enters is the large winning opening for executing the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball enters. It is shorter than the opening time.
According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the horizontal length of the first bridge is shorter than the horizontal length of the second bridge. Even when the opening time is set shorter than the opening time, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry portion.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine
The second starting ball entry portion provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with the large winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A bridge (moving bridge main body 551) provided between the second starting ball entry portion and the large winning opening, and
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 553) for moving the bridge in the horizontal direction is provided.
The bridge
A first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that inclines so as to descend toward the second starting ball entry portion side.
It is provided with a second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) that inclines so as to descend toward the large winning opening side.
The bridge driving unit moves the bridge to the side of the second starting ball, thereby causing the game ball to enter the second starting ball through the first guide surface. By switching to the ball-entry state and moving the bridge to the grand-winning opening side, the second ball-entry-possible state is achieved in which the game ball is inserted into the grand-winning opening via the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized in that the bridge is switched and the bridge is moved to the center of the second starting ball entry portion and the large winning opening to switch to the ball entry impossible state.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball entering portion side, so that the bridge driving unit bridges to the second starting ball entering portion side. By moving the ball, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second starting ball-entry portion via the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the large winning opening side, the bridge drive unit moves the bridge to the large winning opening side to win a large prize through the second guide surface. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the mouth. Further, since the second starting ball entry section and the large winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive section moves the bridge to the center of the second starting ball entry section and the large winning opening. By doing so, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.
Further, since the second starting ball entry portion is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the large winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means can be used. , By distributing the game ball in the horizontal and horizontal directions, the ball is entered into the second starting ball entry section or the large winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C5 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
A first guide plate (first guide plate 554) that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, and
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) for guiding the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface is provided.
The bridge drive unit projects the first guide plate with respect to the game board and immerses the second guide plate with respect to the game board, whereby the first guide plate and the first guide plate are immersed. Switching to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second starting ball-entry portion via the guide surface of 1, the second guide plate is projected from the game board, and the above-mentioned By immersing the first guide plate in the game board, the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized in that the first guide plate and the second guide plate are immersed in the gaming board to switch to the capable state, thereby switching to the non-entry state.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, since the first guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, the bridge drive unit uses the first guide plate. By projecting from the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second start ball-entry portion via the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the bridge drive unit causes the second guide plate to project with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the grand prize opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. Further, since the second starting ball entry section and the large winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive section sets the first guide plate and the second guide plate to the game board. By immersing yourself, you can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the ball entry state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball entry enable state. In the second ball-entry state, the game ball falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine
The second starting ball entry portion provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with the large winning opening provided so as to be provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the second starting ball entry portion and to open on one side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A first bridge (upper bridge 571) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball entry portion side.
A second bridge (lower bridge 572) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the large winning opening side.
It is provided with a bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 573) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to sink into the game board.
The bridge driving unit causes the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry unit via the first bridge by projecting the first bridge with respect to the game board. By switching to the ball-enabled state and projecting the second bridge with respect to the game board, the game ball is inserted into the grand prize opening via the second bridge. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first bridge and the second bridge are immersed in the gaming board to switch to the non-entering state.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, since the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball entry side, the bridge driving unit makes the first bridge with respect to the game board. By projecting the ball, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second starting ball-entry portion via the first bridge. Since the second bridge inclines so as to descend toward the winning opening side, the bridge drive unit is large via the second bridge by projecting the second bridge with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the winning opening. Further, since the second starting ball entry portion and the large winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive portion immerses the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board. By doing so, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine
The second starting ball entry portion provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with the large winning opening provided so as to be provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the second starting ball entry portion and to open on one side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
An elevating bridge (elevating bridge 56) provided on one side of the second starting ball entry portion and the large winning opening in the horizontal direction,
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 563) for raising and lowering the elevating bridge is provided.
The elevating bridge
The first ascending / descending state in which the game ball is guided to the second starting ball entering portion by inclining so as to descend toward the second starting ball entering portion side.
A second ascending / descending state in which the game ball is guided to the large winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the large winning opening side.
It is provided with a second starting ball entry portion and a third ascending / descending state in which a game ball is not guided to the large winning opening.
The bridge drive unit sets the elevating bridge to the first elevating state, so that the gaming ball is admitted to the second starting ball entry unit via the elevating bridge. By switching to and setting the elevating bridge to the second elevating state, the elevating bridge is switched to the second elevating state in which the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening via the elevating bridge. The gaming machine is characterized in that the ball is switched to the non-entry state by setting the above-mentioned third ascending / descending state.

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, in the first ascending / descending state, the elevating bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball entering portion side to guide the game ball to the second starting ball entering portion. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second start ball-entry unit via the elevating bridge by setting the elevating bridge to the first elevating state. it can. In the second elevating state, the elevating bridge inclines so as to descend toward the large winning opening side to guide the game ball to the large winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit puts the elevating bridge into the second elevating state. By setting, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening via the elevating bridge. Further, since the elevating bridge does not guide the game ball to the second starting ball entry portion and the grand prize opening in the third elevating state, the bridge drive unit sets the elevating bridge to the third elevating state. You can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The variable winning device is
The second starting ball entry portion provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with the large winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided between the second starting ball entry portion and the large winning opening, and
A bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) for rotating the bridge is provided.
The bridge
The first rotation state (left rotation state) in which the game ball is guided to the second start ball entry portion by inclining so as to descend toward the second start ball entry portion side.
It is provided with a second rotating state (right rotating state) that guides the game ball to the large winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the large winning opening side.
By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge driving unit is in the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second starting ball-entry unit via the bridge. By switching and setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the game is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening via the bridge. Machine.

According to the feature C9 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the second starting ball entering portion side to guide the game ball to the second starting ball entering portion. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second start ball-entry unit via the bridge by setting the bridge in the first rotation state. .. In the second rotating state, the bridge inclines so as to descend toward the large winning opening and guides the game ball to the large winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit puts the bridge in the second rotating state. By setting, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening via the bridge. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.
Further, since the second starting ball entry portion is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the large winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means can be used. , By distributing the game ball in the horizontal and horizontal directions, the ball is entered into the second starting ball entry section or the large winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C9 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
The bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board, and
The bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543 and advance / retreat drive unit 544) that rotates the bridge after the bridge is recessed with respect to the game board and the bridge is projected from the game board. With and
The bridge
After projecting with respect to the game board, it is inclined so as to descend toward the second start ball entry portion, and a first rotation state (left turn) for guiding the game ball to the second start ball entry portion. (Dynamic state) and
It is provided with a second rotating state (right rotating state) in which the game ball is guided to the large winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the large winning opening side after protruding from the game board. ,
After projecting the bridge with respect to the gaming board, the bridge driving unit sets the bridge in the first rotating state, thereby playing a game on the second starting ball entry unit via the bridge. By switching to the first ball-entry state in which the ball is inserted, projecting the bridge with respect to the game board, and then setting the bridge to the second rotation state, the bridge is passed through the bridge. The game is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening, and the bridge is immersed in the game board to switch to the ball-incapable state. Machine.

According to the feature C10 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge protrudes with respect to the game board and then tilts so as to descend toward the second starting ball entry portion side. Since the game ball is guided to the starting ball entry section, the bridge drive section sets the bridge to the first rotating state so that the game ball enters the second starting ball entry section via the bridge. You can switch to a state where you can enter the ball. In the second rotating state, the bridge protrudes with respect to the game board and then inclines so as to descend toward the large winning opening side to guide the game ball to the large winning opening. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening via the bridge. Further, since the second starting ball entry section and the large winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive section is in a state where the ball cannot enter by immersing the bridge in the game board. You can switch. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can prevent the flow path of the game ball from being obstructed when the ball is switched to the non-entry state.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C9 of the present invention group,
The bridge drive unit is characterized in that the bridge is rotated so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the second starting ball entry unit or the grand prize opening, thereby switching to the non-entry state. A game machine to play.

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, the bridge drive unit is put into a non-entry state by rotating the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the second starting ball entry unit or the large winning opening. You can switch. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can switch the bridge to the non-entry state without adding a new structure.

According to the feature C group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device has a monotonous function of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls when the game balls are entered, the player's attention to the game may decrease. There's a problem.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. It is advantageous for the player based on the results of the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. A game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and a variable winning device (main control device 60) that shifts the game ball to a state in which the game ball can enter when the specific control state is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) equipped with a variable winning device 5C).
The variable winning device is
A small prize ball winning opening (first winning opening 51) that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls when entering a game ball, and
A multi-prize ball winning opening (second winning opening 52) that pays out more prize balls than the small prize ball winning opening when entering a game ball, and
The game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening, the first ball is not allowed to enter the multi-prize ball winning opening, and the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening. At the same time, a second ball-entry state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the small prize ball winning opening, and a ball incapable of entering the game ball in neither the small prize ball winning opening nor the multi-prize ball winning opening. It is equipped with a ball entry state switching means for switching between a state and a hold state for holding a game ball.
When the gaming state transition means shifts to the specific control state, after switching to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means, the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state is possible. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a state and switching to the non-ball entry state by the ball entry state switching means when the state has not been shifted to the specific control state.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the variable winning device includes the ball-entry state switching means. Therefore, when the specific control state is entered, the variable winning device is switched to the hold state by the ball-entry state switching means. By switching to the first ball-entry state, the game ball can be put into the small prize ball winning opening that executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and the game ball is switched to the hold state by the ball-entry state switching means. After that, by switching to the second entry-capable state, the game ball can be inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening that executes the payout of a larger number of prize balls than the small prize ball winning opening. In addition, when the variable winning device has not shifted to the specific control state, the variable winning device switches the ball to the non-entry state by the ball entry state switching means, so that the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the number of winning balls can be changed by switching the winning state after switching to the holding state by the ball entering state switching means and then switching the ball winning state. , The player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball held by the ball entry state switching means, and the player can improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state by the ball-entry state switching means, and then again the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state. The game (round game) in the specific control state is defined as one game (round game) until the ball is switched to the ball-entry state, and when the game shifts to the specific control state, the ball-entry state is executed every time the game in the specific control state is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that after switching to the holding state by a switching means, the gaming machine is switched to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, when the game state transition means shifts to the specific control state, the gaming state transition means is switched to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means every time the game of the specific control state is executed. Since the player switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball held by the ball-entry state switching means every time the game in the specific control state is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D2 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means
A ball-fillable state selection unit (round prize ball determination process) that selects either the first ball-fillable state or the second ball-fillable state, and
When the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching means switches to the first ball-entry state and the ball-entry state selection unit is used. When the second ball-entry state is selected in the above, the ball-entry state switching unit (bridge rotation process) for switching to the second ball-entry state is provided by the ball-entry state switching means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, when the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the game state transition means is the first ball-entry state switching means. When the ball is switched to the possible state and the second ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching unit is used to switch to the second ball-entry state switching unit. Since the player is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-entry-possible state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry-possible state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D3 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. ..

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the ball-entry state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-entry state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D4 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The small prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the multi-prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A first bridge (first bridge 512) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the prize ball winning opening side.
A second bridge (second bridge) that is provided so as to intersect the first bridge so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the winning opening side of the multi-prize ball. Bridge 522) and
It is provided with a bridge drive unit (first bridge drive unit 514 and second bridge drive unit 524) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to be recessed with respect to the game board.
The bridge driving unit projects the first bridge with respect to the gaming board and immerses the second bridge with respect to the gaming board, whereby the small prize is awarded through the first bridge. The game ball is inserted into the ball winning opening. The state is switched to the first ball-entry state, the second bridge is projected from the game board, and the first bridge is immersed in the game board. By allowing the game ball to enter the multi-prize ball winning opening via the second bridge, the game is switched to the second ball-entry state, and the first bridge and the second bridge are moved to the game. It is characterized in that it switches to the non-entry state by immersing it in the board, and switches to the hold state by projecting the first bridge and the second bridge with respect to the game board. Amusement machine.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, since the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the prize ball winning opening side, the bridge drive unit projects the first bridge with respect to the game board. By letting the ball enter, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the first bridge. Since the second bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the winning opening side of the multi-prize ball, the bridge drive unit passes through the second bridge by projecting the second bridge with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening. Further, since the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit immerses the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board. By making it possible, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Since the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect with each other, the bridge drive unit holds the first bridge and the second bridge by projecting the first bridge and the second bridge with respect to the game board. You can switch to the state. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.
Further, since the small prize ball winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the multi-prize ball winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. By allocating the game balls in the horizontal and horizontal directions, the ball is entered into the small prize ball winning opening or the multi-prize ball winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D4 of the present invention group.
The variable winning device is
The small prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with the multi-prize ball winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The ball entry state switching means
A bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided between the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening, and
A bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) for rotating the bridge is provided.
The bridge
The first rotation state (left rotation state) in which the game ball is guided to the small prize ball winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the small prize ball winning opening side.
A second rotation state (right rotation state) in which the game ball is guided to the multi-prize ball winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side.
The small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening are provided with a horizontal state in which the game ball is held without being guided.
By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge driving unit switches to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the bridge. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the bridge is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening via the bridge, and the bridge is moved to the second rotating state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is switched to the holding state by setting it in the horizontal state.

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the small prize ball winning opening side, and thus guides the game ball to the small prize ball winning opening. By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge driving unit can switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the bridge. In the second rotating state, the bridge inclines so as to descend toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side to guide the game ball to the multi-prize ball winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit makes the bridge a second. By setting the rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening via the bridge. Then, in the horizontal state, the bridge holds the game ball without guiding the game ball to the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening. Therefore, the bridge drive unit holds the game ball by setting the bridge in the horizontal state. You can switch to the hold state. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.
Further, since the small prize ball winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the multi-prize ball winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. By allocating the game balls in the horizontal and horizontal directions, the ball is entered into the small prize ball winning opening or the multi-prize ball winning opening. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D6 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
The bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board, and
The bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543 and advance / retreat drive unit 544) that rotates the bridge after the bridge is recessed with respect to the game board and the bridge is projected from the game board. With and
The bridge
A first rotating state (left-handed rotating state) that guides the game ball to the small prize ball winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the small prize ball winning opening side after projecting from the game board. )When,
A second rotating state (right-handed rotating state) that guides the game ball to the multi-prize ball winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side after projecting with respect to the game board. )When,
After protruding with respect to the game board, it is provided with a horizontal state in which the game ball is held without being guided to the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening.
The bridge drive unit projects the bridge with respect to the game board, and then sets the bridge in the first rotating state, so that the game ball enters the small prize ball winning opening via the bridge. Is switched to the first ball-entry state, the bridge is projected from the game board, and then the bridge is set to the second rotation state, thereby passing through the bridge. By switching to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening and immersing the bridge in the game board, the ball is switched to the ball-incapable state, and the bridge is switched to the above-mentioned bridge. A gaming machine characterized in that the bridge is set to the horizontal state after being projected from the gaming board to switch to the holding state.

According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge protrudes from the game board and then tilts so as to descend toward the prize ball winning opening side. Since the game ball is guided to the winning opening, the bridge drive unit can set the bridge to the first rotating state so that the game ball can be inserted into the small prize ball winning opening via the bridge. You can switch to the state. In the second rotating state, the bridge projects from the game board and then inclines so as to descend toward the multi-prize ball winning opening side to guide the game ball to the multi-prize ball winning opening. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the drive unit can switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the multi-prize ball winning opening via the bridge. Further, since the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit is in a state where the ball cannot be entered by immersing the bridge in the game board. Can be switched to. Then, in the horizontal state, after the bridge protrudes from the game board, the bridge holds the game ball to the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening without guiding the game ball, so that the bridge drive unit puts the bridge in the horizontal state. By setting, it is possible to switch to the hold state in which the game ball is held. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can prevent the flow path of the game ball from being obstructed when the ball is switched to the non-entry state.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D6 of the present invention group,
The bridge drive unit is characterized in that the bridge is rotated so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the small prize ball winning opening or the multi-prize ball winning opening, thereby switching to the non-entry state. A game machine to be.

According to the feature D8 of the present invention group, the bridge drive unit rotates the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the small prize ball winning opening or the multi-prize ball winning opening, so that the ball cannot be entered. Can be switched to. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can switch the bridge to the non-entry state without adding a new structure.

According to the feature D group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device executes a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls are entered, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) including a launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board and a ball entering means for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 10) And
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning opening 51, 51B) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with a second winning opening (second winning opening 52, 52B) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The gaming machine
A first enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening, a second enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the second winning opening, and the first winning opening. And any of the second winning openings is provided with a ball-entry state switching means for switching between a ball-impaired state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter.
The ball entry state switching means
A first bridge (first bridge 512, 512B) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side.
A second bridge (second bridge 522,522B) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
It is provided with a bridge drive unit (first bridge drive unit 514,514B and second bridge drive unit 524,524B) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to sink into the game board.
The bridge driving unit projects the first bridge with respect to the gaming board, so that the gaming ball is inserted into the first winning opening through the first bridge. By switching to the enabled state and projecting the second bridge with respect to the gaming board, the second winning ball can be inserted into the second winning opening via the second bridge. A gaming machine characterized in that the first bridge and the second bridge are immersed in the gaming board to switch to the non-entering state.

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, since the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side, the bridge drive unit projects the first bridge with respect to the game board. By allowing the game ball to enter the first winning opening via the first bridge, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state. Since the second bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side, the bridge drive unit passes through the second bridge by projecting the second bridge with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit immerses the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board. By letting the ball enter, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the first winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the second winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. Will be placed in the first winning opening or the second winning opening by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and horizontal directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect with each other.

According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, since the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect each other, when they are provided so as not to intersect each other (for example, offset in the vertical direction). The ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area, as compared with the case where the ball entry state switching means is provided.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E2 of the present invention group,
The first bridge and the second bridge have slits formed along the sinking direction, and the slit of the first bridge (slit 5124) and the slit of the second bridge (slit 5224). ) And are engaged with each other along the sinking direction of the first bridge and the second bridge so as to intersect with each other.

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, the first bridge and the second bridge have the slit of the first bridge and the slit of the second bridge in the recessing direction of the first bridge and the second bridge. Since they are provided so as to intersect with each other by engaging with each other, the configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge can be simplified.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E2 of the present invention group,
The first bridge and the second bridge are horizontal with a one-sided bridge piece (one-sided bridge piece 5221K) in which either one of the first bridge and the second bridge is located on one side in the horizontal direction. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided so as to intersect with a bridge piece on the other side (bridge piece 5222K on the other side) located on the other side in the direction.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the first bridge and the second bridge are provided so as to intersect by dividing either the first bridge or the second bridge. , The configuration of the first bridge and the second bridge can be simplified.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E4 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine characterized in that the protrusion width of the first bridge and the second bridge from the gaming board is set to be narrower than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the feature E5 of the present invention group, the protrusion width of the first bridge and the second bridge from the game board is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, and is therefore the same as the diameter of the game ball. Compared to the case where the width is set, the first bridge and the second bridge can be quickly immersed in the game board. Therefore, the bridge drive unit has a first winning opening or a second winning opening at the first bridge or the second bridge immediately after the first bridge or the second bridge is immersed in the game board. It is possible to suppress the over-winning that causes the game ball that has been guided to the first winning opening or the second winning opening.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E4 of the present invention group.
At least one of the first bridge and the second bridge is a fall prevention unit (fall prevention unit 5125) that prevents the game ball from falling toward the protrusion direction side of the first bridge and the second bridge. , 5225).

According to the feature E6 of the present invention group, at least one of the first bridge and the second bridge is a fall prevention that prevents the game ball from falling toward the protruding direction side of the first bridge and the second bridge. Since the unit is provided, it is possible to reliably insert the game ball into at least one of the first winning opening and the second winning opening.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E6 of the present invention group.
The first winning opening having a cover (covers 511 and 511B) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the first winning opening.
It is provided with the second winning opening having a cover (covers 521, 521B) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
A gaming machine characterized in that the upper surface portion of the cover has a shape protruding toward the opening direction with respect to the lower surface portion of the cover.

According to the feature E7 of the present invention group, the upper surface portion of the cover has a shape protruding toward the opening direction from the lower surface portion of the cover, so that the upper surface portion of the cover is closer to the opening direction side than the lower surface portion of the cover. Compared with the case where the shape does not protrude, the game ball is less likely to accidentally win a prize in the first winning opening or the second winning opening.

According to the feature E group of the present invention as described above, the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved. The problem can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a certain path from the vertically upper side to the vertically lower side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) including a launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board and a ball entering means for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 10) And
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning opening 51D) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with a second winning opening (second winning opening 52D) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The gaming machine
A first enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening, a second enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the second winning opening, and the first winning opening. And any of the second winning openings is provided with a ball-entry state switching means for switching between a ball-impaired state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter.
The ball entry state switching means
A bridge (moving bridge main body 551,551E) provided between the first winning opening and the second winning opening, and
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 553) for moving the bridge in the horizontal direction is provided.
The bridge
A first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side, and
It is provided with a second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) that is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
The bridge driving unit moves the bridge to the first winning opening side, so that the gaming ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the first guide surface. By switching to the enabled state and moving the bridge to the second winning opening side, the second winning opening allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening via the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a state and switching to the non-entry state by moving the bridge to the center of the first winning opening and the second winning opening.

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side, so that the bridge drive unit moves the bridge to the first winning opening side. By making the ball enter, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening through the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side, the bridge drive unit moves the bridge toward the second winning opening side to move the second guide surface to the second winning opening side. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit has a bridge in the center of the first winning opening and the second winning opening. By moving it, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the first winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the second winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. Will be placed in the first winning opening or the second winning opening by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and horizontal directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
A first guide plate (first guide plate 554) that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, and
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) for guiding the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface is provided.
The bridge drive unit projects the first guide plate with respect to the game board and immerses the second guide plate with respect to the game board, whereby the first guide plate and the first guide plate are immersed. The game ball is inserted into the first winning opening through the guide surface 1. The state is switched to the first ball-entry state, the second guide plate is projected from the game board, and the first ball is inserted. By immersing the guide plate 1 in the game board, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized in that the first guide plate and the second guide plate are immersed in the gaming board to switch to the ball-capable state, thereby switching to the ball-impossible state.

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, since the first guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, the bridge drive unit uses the first guide plate. By projecting from the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening through the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the bridge drive unit causes the second guide plate to project with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit sets the first guide plate and the second guide plate to the game board. By immersing yourself in the ball, you can switch to a state where you cannot enter the ball. Therefore, the ball entry state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball entry enable state. In the second ball-entry state, the game ball falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F2 of the present invention group,
By moving the bridge to the first winning opening side, the ball-entry state switching means causes the first guide plate to protrude from the game board and causes the second guide plate to play the game. By immersing the bridge in the board and moving the bridge toward the second winning opening side, the second guide plate is projected from the game board, and the first guide plate is projected from the game board. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a link mechanism (link mechanism 556) that immerses the player in the game.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching means includes a link mechanism for interlocking and sinking the first guide plate and the second guide plate by moving the bridge. Power sources such as motors and actuators can be eliminated.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F3 of the present invention group.
The first winning opening having a cover (cover 511) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the first winning opening.
It is provided with the second winning opening having a cover (cover 521) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
A gaming machine characterized in that the upper surface portion of the cover has a shape protruding toward the opening direction with respect to the lower surface portion of the cover.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the upper surface portion of the cover has a shape protruding toward the opening direction from the lower surface portion of the cover, so that the upper surface portion of the cover is closer to the opening direction side than the lower surface portion of the cover. Compared with the case where the shape does not protrude, the game ball is less likely to accidentally win a prize in the first winning opening or the second winning opening.

According to the feature F group of the present invention as described above, the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved. The problem can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a certain path from the vertically upper side to the vertically lower side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) including a launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board and a ball entering means for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 10) And
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning opening 51F, 51G) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with a second winning opening (second winning opening 52F, 52G) provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the first winning opening and also provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction.
The gaming machine
A first enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening, a second enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the second winning opening, and the first winning opening. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a ball-entry state switching means for switching between a ball-incapable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter in any of the second winning openings.

According to the feature G1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has a first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening and a second ball in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening. Since it is equipped with a ball-entry state switching means for switching between a ball-entry state and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter in either the first winning opening or the second winning opening, the ball flows down the game area. The movement of the game ball can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.
Further, the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction. The second winning opening is provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the first winning opening. Therefore, since the directions of the game balls flowing down to enter the first winning opening and the second winning opening are the same, the first winning state or the second entering is possible by the entry state switching means. When the ball-enabled state is switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the game ball enters the first winning opening or the second winning opening. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
A first bridge (upper bridge 571) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side.
A second bridge (lower bridge 572) that is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
It is provided with a bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 573) that causes the first bridge and the second bridge to sink into the game board.
The bridge driving unit projects the first bridge with respect to the gaming board and immerses the second bridge with respect to the gaming board, whereby the first bridge is passed through the first bridge. Switch to the first ball-entry state, project the second bridge with respect to the game board, and immerse the first bridge with respect to the game board. By causing the pachinko ball to enter the second winning opening through the second bridge, the game is switched to the second ball-entry state, and the first bridge and the second bridge are moved to the game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is switched to the above-mentioned non-entry state by immersing it in the board.

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the first bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side, so that the bridge drive unit projects the first bridge with respect to the game board. By allowing the game ball to enter the first winning opening via the first bridge, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state. Since the second bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side, the bridge drive unit passes through the second bridge by projecting the second bridge with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit immerses the first bridge and the second bridge in the game board. By letting the ball enter, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the protrusion width of the first bridge and the second bridge from the gaming board is set to be narrower than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the protrusion width of the first bridge and the second bridge from the game board is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, and is therefore the same as the diameter of the game ball. Compared to the case where the width is set, the first bridge and the second bridge can be quickly immersed in the game board. Therefore, the bridge drive unit has a first winning opening or a second winning opening at the first bridge or the second bridge immediately after the first bridge or the second bridge is immersed in the game board. It is possible to suppress the over-winning that causes the game ball that has been guided to the first winning opening or the second winning opening.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G2 or the feature G3 of the present invention group
At least one of the first bridge and the second bridge is provided with a fall prevention portion for preventing the game ball from falling toward the projecting direction side of the first bridge and the second bridge. And.

According to the feature G4 of the present invention group, at least one of the first bridge and the second bridge is a fall prevention that prevents the game ball from falling toward the protruding direction side of the first bridge and the second bridge. Since the unit is provided, it is possible to reliably insert the game ball into at least one of the first winning opening and the second winning opening.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
A bridge (elevating bridge 56) provided on one side of the first winning opening and the second winning opening in the horizontal direction, and
A bridge drive unit (bridge drive unit 563) for raising and lowering the bridge is provided.
The bridge
A first ascending / descending state in which the game ball is guided to the first winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the first winning opening side.
A second ascending / descending state in which the game ball is guided to the second winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
The first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided with a third ascending / descending state in which the game ball is not guided.
By setting the bridge to the first elevating state, the bridge driving unit switches to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the bridge. By setting the bridge in the second elevating state, the bridge is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the bridge, and the bridge is placed in the third. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the above-mentioned non-entry state by setting the elevating state.

According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, in the first ascending / descending state, the bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side and guides the game ball to the first winning opening. By setting the bridge to the first elevating state, the drive unit can switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the bridge. In the second ascending / descending state, the bridge inclines so as to descend toward the second winning opening side to guide the game ball to the second winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit raises and lowers the bridge for the second time. By setting the state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the bridge. Further, since the bridge does not guide the game ball to the first winning opening and the second winning opening in the third elevating state, the bridge drive unit enters by setting the bridge in the third elevating state. It is possible to switch to the ball impossible state. Therefore, the gaming machine can simplify the configuration of the ball entry state switching means.

According to the feature G group of the present invention as described above, the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved. The problem can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a certain path from the vertically upper side to the vertically lower side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) including a launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board and a ball entering means for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 10) And
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning opening 51) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with a second winning opening (second winning opening 52) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The gaming machine
A first enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening, a second enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the second winning opening, and the first winning opening. And any of the second winning openings is provided with a ball-entry state switching means for switching between a ball-impaired state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter.
The ball entry state switching means
A bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided between the first winning opening and the second winning opening, and
A bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543) for rotating the bridge is provided.
The bridge
The first rotating state (left rotating state) in which the game ball is guided to the first winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the first winning opening side.
It is provided with a second rotating state (right rotating state) in which the game ball is guided to the second winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge driving unit switches to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the bridge. By setting the bridge in the second rotating state, the bridge is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the bridge. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H1 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side and guides the game ball to the first winning opening. By setting the bridge to the first rotating state, the bridge driving unit can switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the bridge. In the second rotating state, the bridge inclines so as to descend toward the second winning opening side to guide the game ball to the second winning opening, so that the bridge drive unit makes the bridge the second winning opening. By setting the rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the bridge. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the first winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the second winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. Will be placed in the first winning opening or the second winning opening by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and horizontal directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature H2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature H1 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
The bridge (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board, and
The bridge drive unit (rotation drive unit 543 and advance / retreat drive unit 544) that rotates the bridge after the bridge is recessed with respect to the game board and the bridge is projected from the game board. With and
The bridge
A first rotating state (left-handed rotating state) that guides the game ball to the first winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the first winning opening side after projecting with respect to the game board. )When,
A second rotation state (right rotation state) that guides the game ball to the second winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the second winning opening side after projecting with respect to the game board. ) And
The bridge driving unit projects the bridge with respect to the gaming board, and then sets the bridge in the first rotating state, whereby the gaming ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the bridge. Is switched to the first ball-entry state, the bridge is projected from the game board, and then the bridge is set to the second rotation state, thereby passing through the bridge. It is characterized in that it switches to the second ball-entry state in which a game ball is inserted into the second winning opening, and switches to the ball-impossible state by immersing the bridge in the game board. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature H2 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the bridge protrudes from the game board and then tilts so as to descend toward the first winning opening side. Since the game ball is guided to the winning opening, the bridge drive unit can enter the game ball into the first winning opening via the bridge by setting the bridge in the first rotating state. You can switch to the state. In the second rotating state, the bridge projects from the game board and then inclines so as to descend toward the second winning opening side to guide the game ball to the second winning opening. By setting the bridge to the second rotating state, the drive unit can switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the bridge. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the bridge drive unit is in a state where the ball cannot be entered by immersing the bridge in the game board. Can be switched to. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can prevent the flow path of the game ball from being obstructed when the ball is switched to the non-entry state.

Feature H3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature H1 of the present invention group,
The bridge drive unit is characterized in that the bridge is rotated so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the first winning opening or the second winning opening, thereby switching to the non-entry state. A game machine to be.

According to the feature H3 of the present invention group, the bridge drive unit rotates the bridge so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the first winning opening or the second winning opening, so that the ball cannot be entered. Can be switched to. Therefore, the bridge drive unit can switch the bridge to the non-entry state without adding a new structure.

Feature H4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features H1 to H3 of the present invention group.
The ball-entry state switching means switches between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry-possible state, the ball-impossible state, and the hold state in which the game ball is held.
The bridge
It has a horizontal state in which the game ball is held without being guided to the first winning opening and the second winning opening.
The bridge driving unit is a gaming machine characterized in that the bridge is switched to the holding state by setting the bridge in the horizontal state.

According to the feature H4 of the present invention group, in the horizontal state, the bridge holds the game ball without guiding the game ball to the first winning opening and the second winning opening, so that the bridge driving unit sets the bridge in the horizontal state. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the hold state in which the game ball is held. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the functions of the ball entry state switching means.

Feature H5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features H1 to H4 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine characterized in that the protruding width of the bridge from the gaming board is set to be narrower than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the feature H5 of the present invention group, the protruding width of the bridge from the game board is set to be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, so that the width is set to be the same as the diameter of the game ball. In comparison, the bridge can be quickly immersed in the game board. Therefore, immediately after the bridge is immersed in the game board, the bridge drive unit moves the game ball that has been guided to the first winning opening or the second winning opening by the bridge into the first winning opening or the second winning opening. It is possible to suppress over-winning that causes the winning opening to win a prize.

Feature H6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features H1 to H5 of the present invention group.
The bridge is characterized by including a fall prevention portion for preventing the game ball from falling toward the projecting direction side of the bridge.

According to the feature H6 of the present invention group, the bridge is provided with a fall prevention portion for preventing the game ball from falling toward the projecting direction side of the bridge, so that the first winning opening or the second winning opening is reliably used. A game ball can be inserted.

Feature H7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features H1 to H6 of the present invention group.
The first winning opening having a cover (cover 511) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and the first winning opening.
It is provided with the second winning opening having a cover (cover 521) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
A gaming machine characterized in that the upper surface portion of the cover has a shape protruding toward the opening direction with respect to the lower surface portion of the cover.

According to the feature H7 of the present invention group, the upper surface portion of the cover has a shape protruding toward the opening direction side from the lower surface portion of the cover, so that the upper surface portion of the cover is closer to the opening direction side than the lower surface portion of the cover. Compared with the case where the shape does not protrude, the game ball is less likely to accidentally win a prize in the first winning opening or the second winning opening.

According to the feature H group of the present invention as described above, the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved. The problem can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a certain path from the vertically upper side to the vertically lower side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) including a launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board and a ball entering means for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 10) And
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning opening 51, 51B, 51D) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with a second winning opening (second winning opening 52, 52A, 52B, 52D) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The gaming machine
A first enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening, a second enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the second winning opening, and the first winning opening. The ball-entry state switching means provided between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is switched between the first winning opening and the non-entry state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter any of the second winning openings. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

According to the feature I1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has a first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening and a second ball in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening. Since it is provided with a ball-entry state switching means for switching between a ball-entry state and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter in either the first winning opening or the second winning opening, a gaming ball flowing down the game area is provided. It is possible to diversify the movement of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the first winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the second winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. Will be placed in the first winning opening or the second winning opening by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and horizontal directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature I2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I1 of the present invention group
The ball entry state switching means
A first derivative (first bridge 521,512B) that guides a game ball to the first winning opening, and
A second derivative (second bridge 522,522B) that guides the game ball to the second winning opening, and
It is provided with a derivative driving unit (first bridge driving unit 514,514B and second bridge driving unit 524,524B) that independently drives the first derivative and the second derivative.
By driving the first derivative, the derivative driving unit switches to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening, and drives the second derivative. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the second ball-entry state in which a game ball is inserted into the second winning opening.

According to the feature I2 of the present invention group, the derivative driving unit switches to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening by driving the first derivative, and the second By driving the derivative, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature I3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I2 of the present invention group
The ball entry state switching means
The first derivative (first bridge 512, 512B), which is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side,
The second derivative (second bridge 522,522B), which is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side,
It is provided with the derivative driving unit (first bridge driving unit 514,514B and second bridge driving unit 524,524B) that causes the first derivative and the second derivative to sink into the game board.
The derivative driving unit causes the game ball to enter the first winning opening via the first derivative by projecting the first derivative with respect to the game board. By switching to the possible state and projecting the second derivative with respect to the game board, the second winning ball can be inserted into the second winning opening via the second derivative. A gaming machine characterized in that the first derivative and the second derivative are immersed in the gaming board to switch to the non-entering state.

According to the feature I3 of the present invention group, the first derivative is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side, so that the derivative driving unit projects the first derivative with respect to the game board. By allowing the game ball to enter the first winning opening via the first derivative, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state. Since the second derivative is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side, the derivative driving unit is interposed through the second derivative by projecting the second derivative with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the derivative driving unit immerses the first derivative and the second derivative in the game board. By letting the ball enter, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature I4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I3 of the present invention group
A gaming machine characterized in that the first derivative and the second derivative are provided so as to intersect with each other.

According to the feature I4 of the present invention group, since the first derivative and the second derivative are provided so as to intersect each other, they are provided so as not to intersect each other (for example, offset in the vertical direction). The ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area, as compared with the case where the ball entry state switching means is provided.

Feature I5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I1 of the present invention group
The ball entry state switching means
A switching derivative (moving bridge body 551 and rotating bridge 541) that guides a game ball to either the first winning opening or the second winning opening, and
A switching derivative driving unit (bridge driving unit 553, rotating driving unit 543, and advancing / retreating driving unit 544) for driving the switching derivative is provided.
By driving the switching derivative, the switching derivative driving unit inserts the game ball into the first winning opening or the second winning opening. A gaming machine characterized in that the ball is switched to the second ball-entry state.

According to the feature I5 of the present invention group, the switching derivative driving unit is in a first winning state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening by driving the switching derivative, or a second winning opening. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature I6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I5 of the present invention group
The ball entry state switching means
The switching derivative driving unit (bridge driving unit 553) for moving the switching derivative (moving bridge main body 551) along the horizontal direction is provided.
The switching derivative is
A first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side, and
It is provided with a second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) that is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
The switching derivative driving unit moves the switching derivative to the first winning opening side, so that the gaming ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the first guide surface. By switching to the ball-entry state and moving the switching derivative to the second winning opening side, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized in that the switching derivative is switched to the ball-entryable state and the switching derivative is moved to the center of the first winning opening and the second winning opening to switch to the ball-impossible state.

According to the feature I6 of the present invention group, the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side, so that the switching derivative driving unit is the switching derivative toward the first winning opening side. By moving the ball, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side, the switching derivative driving unit moves the switching derivative to the second winning opening side to guide the second guide. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening through the surface. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching derivative drive unit is switched to the center of the first winning opening and the second winning opening. By moving the derivative, it is possible to switch to the impassable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature I7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I6 of the present invention group
The ball entry state switching means
A first guide plate (first guide plate 554) that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, and
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) for guiding the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface is provided.
The switching derivative driving unit projects the first guide plate with respect to the game board and immerses the second guide plate with respect to the game board, thereby causing the first guide plate and the game board to be immersed. The game ball is inserted into the first winning opening through the first guide surface, and the game ball is switched to the first ball-entry state, the second guide plate is projected from the game board, and the game board is projected. By immersing the first guide plate in the game board, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized in that the first guide plate and the second guide plate are immersed in the gaming board to switch to the non-entering state.

According to the feature I7 of the present invention group, since the first guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, the switching derivative driving unit is the first guide plate. By projecting the game ball with respect to the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening through the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the switching derivative drive unit causes the second guide plate to protrude from the game board. , It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching derivative driving unit uses the first guide plate and the second guide plate as the game board. By immersing it in the ball, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the ball entry state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball entry enable state. In the second ball-entry state, the game ball falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature I8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I5 of the present invention group
The ball entry state switching means
A switching derivative driving unit (rotating drive unit 543) for rotating the switching derivative (rotating bridge 541) is provided.
The switching derivative is
The first rotating state (left rotating state) in which the game ball is guided to the first winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the first winning opening side.
It is provided with a second rotating state (right rotating state) in which the game ball is guided to the second winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
By setting the switching derivative to the first rotating state, the switching derivative driving unit can enter the game ball into the first winning opening via the switching derivative. By switching to the state and setting the switching derivative to the second rotating state, the switching derivative is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the switching derivative. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature I8 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the switching derivative is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side and guides the game ball to the first winning opening. By setting the switching derivative to the first rotating state, the switching derivative driving unit can switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the switching derivative. it can. In the second rotating state, the switching derivative is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side and guides the game ball to the second winning opening. Therefore, the switching derivative driving unit uses the switching derivative. By setting to the second rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the switching derivative. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature I9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I8 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
The switching derivative (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board, and
The switching derivative driving unit (rotating drive unit 543 and advancing / retreating) that rotates the switching derivative after the switching derivative is recessed with respect to the game board and the switching derivative is projected from the game board. Equipped with a drive unit 544)
The switching derivative is
A first rotating state (left-handed rotating state) that guides the game ball to the first winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the first winning opening side after projecting with respect to the game board. )When,
A second rotation state (right rotation state) that guides the game ball to the second winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the second winning opening side after projecting with respect to the game board. ) And
The switching derivative driving unit projects the switching derivative with respect to the gaming board, and then sets the switching derivative in the first rotating state, whereby the first prize is won through the switching derivative. By switching to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the mouth, projecting the switching derivative with respect to the game board, and then setting the switching derivative in the second rotating state. , The game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the switching derivative. By switching to the second ball-entry state and immersing the switching derivative in the game board, the ball cannot be entered. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a state.

According to the feature I9 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the switching derivative protrudes from the game board and then tilts so as to descend toward the first winning opening side. Since the game ball is guided to the winning opening of, the switching derivative driving unit sets the switching derivative to the first rotating state, so that the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the switching derivative. It is possible to switch to the state where the ball can be entered. In the second rotating state, the switching derivative projects from the game board and then inclines so as to descend toward the second winning opening side to guide the game ball to the second winning opening. By setting the switching derivative to the second rotating state, the switching derivative driving unit can switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the switching derivative. .. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching derivative driving unit enters the ball by immersing the switching derivative in the game board. You can switch to the disabled state. Therefore, the switching derivative driving unit can prevent the flow path of the game ball from being obstructed when the ball is switched to the non-entry state.

Feature I10.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I8 of the present invention group,
The switching derivative driving unit switches the switching derivative to the non-entry state by rotating the switching derivative so as not to allow the gaming ball to enter either the first winning opening or the second winning opening. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature I10 of the present invention group, the switching derivative driving unit rotates the switching derivative so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the first winning opening or the second winning opening. You can switch to the disabled state. Therefore, the switching derivative driving unit can switch the switching derivative to the non-entry state without adding a new structure.

According to the feature I group of the present invention as described above, the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved. The problem can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a certain path from the vertically upper side to the vertically lower side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) including a launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board and a ball entering means for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 10) And
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning opening 51) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with a second winning opening (second winning opening 52, 52A) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The gaming machine
A first enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening, a second enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the second winning opening, and the first winning opening. The ball-entry state switching means provided between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is switched between the first winning opening and the non-entry state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter any of the second winning openings. Prepare,
The ball entry state switching means
A first derivative (first bridge 512) that guides a game ball to the first winning opening, and
A second derivative (second bridge 522) that guides the game ball to the second winning opening, and
A derivative driving unit (first bridge driving unit 514 and) that sets the validity or invalidity of the first derivative and the second derivative by independently driving the first derivative and the second derivative. With a second bridge drive unit 524)
The derivative driving unit enables the first ball to be inserted into the first winning opening by effectively setting the first derivative and invalidating the second derivative. By switching to the state, setting the second derivative to be valid, and setting the first derivative to be invalid, the second winning state is set to allow the game ball to be inserted into the second winning opening. A gaming machine characterized in that the first derivative and the second derivative are switched and the ball cannot be entered by setting the first derivative and the second derivative to invalid.

According to the feature J1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has a first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening and a second ball in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening. Since it is provided with a ball-entry state switching means for switching between a ball-entry state and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter either the first winning opening or the second winning opening, a gaming ball flowing down the game area It is possible to diversify the movement of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, the derivative driving unit switches to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening by setting the first derivative to be valid and the second derivative to be invalid. , The second derivative is set to be valid, and the first derivative is set to be invalid, so that the game ball can be inserted into the second winning opening to switch to the second ball-entry state, and the first derivative and By setting the second derivative to invalid, it is possible to switch to the non-entry state. In other words, the derivative driving unit switches between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state by switching the validity / invalidity of the first derivative and the second derivative. , In the first ball-fillable state and the second ball-fillable state, neither the first derivative nor the second derivative can be effectively set.

Further, since the first winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the second winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. Will be placed in the first winning opening or the second winning opening by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and horizontal directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-inability state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature J2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature J1 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
The first derivative (first bridge 512), which is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side.
The second derivative (second bridge 522), which is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
The derivative driving unit (first bridge driving unit 514 and second bridge driving unit 524) that causes the first derivative and the second derivative to sink into the game board is provided.
The derivative driving unit effectively sets the first derivative and the second derivative by projecting the first derivative and the second derivative with respect to the game board, and the first derivative. A gaming machine characterized in that the first derivative and the second derivative are invalidated by immersing the derivative and the second derivative in the gaming board.

According to the feature J2 of the present invention group, the first derivative is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side, so that the derivative driving unit projects the first derivative with respect to the game board. By allowing the game ball to be effectively set, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the first derivative. Since the second derivative is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side, the derivative driving unit makes the second derivative effective by projecting the second derivative with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second derivative. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the derivative driving unit immerses the first derivative and the second derivative in the game board. By allowing the first derivative and the second derivative to be invalidated, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter.

Features J3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature J2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first derivative and the second derivative are provided so as to intersect with each other.

According to the feature J3 of the present invention group, since the first derivative and the second derivative are provided so as to intersect each other, they are provided so as not to intersect each other (for example, offset in the vertical direction). The ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area, as compared with the case where the ball entry state switching means is provided.

Features J4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features J1 to J3 of the present invention group.
The gaming machine
Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.
A game state transition means (opening / closing execution mode) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means (open / close execution mode). Main controller 60) and
It is provided with a variable winning device (variable winning device 5) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered.
The variable winning device is
A small prize ball winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening that executes a predetermined number of winning balls when entering a game ball, and
A multi-prize ball winning opening (second winning opening 52) as the second winning opening, which pays out more prize balls than the small prize ball winning opening when the game ball is entered,
The ball entry state switching means is provided.
When the gaming state transition means shifts to the specific control state, the ball entry state switching means switches to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state, and the specific control state A gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry state switching means switches to the ball-incapable state when the player has not shifted to.

According to the feature J4 of the present invention group, since the variable winning device includes the ball-entry state switching means, when the specific control state is entered, the first ball-entry state can be entered by the ball-entry state switching means. By switching to, it is possible to insert a game ball into the small prize ball winning opening that executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and by switching to the second ball-entry state by the ball entry state switching means, A game ball can be inserted into a multi-prize ball winning opening that pays out more prize balls than a small prize ball winning opening. In addition, when the variable winning device has not shifted to the specific control state, the variable winning device switches the ball to the non-entry state by the ball entry state switching means, so that the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the number of winning balls can be changed by switching the ball-entry state switching means by the ball-entry state switching means. The degree of attention can be improved.

Feature J5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature J4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means
A ball-fillable state selection unit (prize ball determination process) for selecting either the first ball-fillable state or the second ball-fillable state, and
When the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching means switches to the first ball-entry state and the ball-entry state selection unit is used. When the second ball-entry state is selected in the above, the ball-entry state switching unit (large winning opening opening process) for switching to the second ball-entry state by the ball-entry state switching means is used. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

According to the feature J5 of the present invention group, when the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the game state transition means is the first ball-entry state switching means. When the ball is switched to the possible state and the second ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching unit is used to switch to the second ball-entry state switching unit. Since the player is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-entry-possible state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry-possible state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features J6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature J5 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. ..

According to the feature J6 of the present invention group, the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-entry state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature J7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features J1 to J3 of the present invention group.
The gaming machine
Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode) which is advantageous for the player. State transition means (main controller 60) and
It is provided with a variable winning device (variable winning device 5A) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered.
The normal control state is
The first gaming state (low probability mode) and
A second gaming state (high probability mode) different from the first gaming state is provided.
The variable winning device is
A normal winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening that executes a predetermined number of winning balls when entering a game ball, and
A specific winning opening (second winning opening 52A) as the second winning opening that sets the normal control state to the second gaming state when the game ball is entered, and
The ball entry state switching means is provided.
When the gaming state transition means shifts to the specific control state, the ball entry state switching means switches to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state, and the specific control state A gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry state switching means switches to the ball-incapable state when the player has not shifted to.

According to the feature J7 of the present invention group, since the variable winning device includes the ball-entry state switching means, when the specific control state is entered, the first ball-entry state can be entered by the ball-entry state switching means. By switching to, the game ball can be put into the normal winning opening that executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and by switching to the second winning state by the ball-entry state switching means, the normal control A game ball can be inserted into a specific winning opening whose state is set to the second game state. In addition, the variable winning device does not allow the game ball to enter the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening by switching to the non-entry state by the ball entry state switching means when the specific control state has not been entered. Can be. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the normal control state can be set to the second gaming state by switching the ball-entry possible state by the ball-entry state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Features J8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature J7 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means, it is determined whether or not the entry state switching means switches to the second entry possible state. The ball entry status determination section (large winning opening opening process) and
When the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening in the specific control state, the normal control state is set to the first gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific winning opening, the above-mentioned A gaming machine including a gaming state setting unit (transition process at the end of open / close execution mode) that sets a normal control state to the second gaming state.

According to the feature J8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is the second ball entry state switching means based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Since it is provided with a ball entry state determination unit that determines whether or not to switch to the ball entry ready state, the player pays attention to the determination result of the ball entry state determination unit, and the second ball entry enable state. You would expect it to be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features J9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature J7 or the feature J8 of the present invention group,
The ball-entry state switching means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second ball-entry state is switched to the first ball-entry state when the game ball enters the specific winning opening.

According to the feature J9 of the present invention group, the ball-entry state switching means switches the second ball-possible state to the first ball-possible state when the game ball enters the specific winning opening. A person can insert a game ball into a specific winning opening and then insert a game ball into a normal winning opening. Then, the normal winning opening can execute a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls are entered. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

According to the feature J group of the present invention as described above, the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved. The problem can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a certain path from the vertically upper side to the vertically lower side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) including a launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board and a ball entering means for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 10) And
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning opening 51, 51B) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with a second winning opening (second winning opening 52, 52B) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The gaming machine
A first enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening, a second enterable state in which a game ball is inserted into the second winning opening, and the first winning opening. The ball-entry state switching means provided between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is switched between the first winning opening and the non-entry state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter any of the second winning openings. Prepare,
The ball entry state switching means
A first derivative (first bridge 521,512B) that guides a game ball to the first winning opening, and
A second derivative (second bridge 522,522B) that guides the game ball to the second winning opening, and
A derivative driving unit (first bridge driving unit 514) that sets the validity or invalidity of the first derivative and the second derivative by independently driving the first derivative and the second derivative. 514B and a second bridge drive unit 524,524B)
By effectively setting the first derivative, the derivative driving unit switches to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening, and the second derivative is effective. By setting to, the player switches to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening, and by setting the first derivative and the second derivative to invalid, the front A gaming machine characterized by switching to a state in which entry is not possible.

According to the feature K1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has a first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening and a second ball in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening. Since it is provided with a ball-entry state switching means for switching between a ball-entry state and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball is not allowed to enter in either the first winning opening or the second winning opening, a gaming ball flowing down the game area is provided. It is possible to diversify the movement of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, the derivative driving unit switches to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening by effectively setting the first derivative, and effectively sets the second derivative. By doing so, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening, and to switch to the ball-incapable state by invalidating the first derivative and the second derivative. it can. In other words, the derivative driving unit switches between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-impossible state by switching the validity / invalidity of the first derivative and the second derivative. , In the first ball-fillable state and the second ball-fillable state, both the first derivative and the second derivative can be effectively set.

Further, since the first winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the second winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. Will be placed in the first winning opening or the second winning opening by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and horizontal directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-inability state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature K2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature K1 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
The first derivative (first bridge 512B), which is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side.
The second derivative (second bridge 522B), which is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board and is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
It is provided with the derivative driving unit (first bridge driving unit 514B and second bridge driving unit 524B) that causes the first derivative and the second derivative to sink into the game board.
The derivative driving unit effectively sets the first derivative and the second derivative by projecting the first derivative and the second derivative with respect to the game board, and the first derivative. A gaming machine characterized in that the first derivative and the second derivative are invalidated by immersing the derivative and the second derivative in the gaming board.

According to the feature K2 of the present invention group, the first derivative is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side, so that the derivative driving unit projects the first derivative with respect to the game board. By allowing the game ball to be effectively set, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the first derivative. Since the second derivative is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side, the derivative driving unit makes the second derivative effective by projecting the second derivative with respect to the game board. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second derivative. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the derivative driving unit immerses the first derivative and the second derivative in the game board. By allowing the first derivative and the second derivative to be invalidated, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter.

Feature K3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature K2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first derivative and the second derivative are provided so as to intersect with each other.

According to the feature K3 of the present invention group, since the first derivative and the second derivative are provided so as to intersect each other, they are provided so as not to intersect each other (for example, offset in the vertical direction). The ball entry state switching means can be installed by effectively utilizing the space of the game area, as compared with the case where the ball entry state switching means is provided.

Features K4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features K1 to K3 of the present invention group.
The gaming machine
Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and first winning opening 51B) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.
A game state transition means (opening / closing execution mode) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means (open / close execution mode). Main controller 60) and
It is provided with a variable winning device (variable winning device 5B) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered.
The variable winning device is
A large winning opening (second winning opening 52B) as the second winning opening for executing a predetermined number of winning balls when entering a game ball is provided.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (first winning opening 51B) as the first winning opening, which is different from the first starting ball entry section.
When the second starting ball entry portion is set to the open state, the gaming state transition means switches to the first ball entry enable state by the ball entry state switching means, and shifts to the specific control state. In this case, when the second ball entry state switching means is used to switch to the second ball entry enable state and the second start ball entry portion is set to the closed state, or when the specific control state has not been entered. Is a gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry state switching means switches to the ball-incapable state.

According to the feature K4 of the present invention group, since the gaming machine is provided with the ball entry state switching means, when the second start ball entry portion is set to the open state, the first ball entry state switching means is used. By switching to the ball-entry state, the game ball can be entered into the second starting ball entry section that executes an internal lottery when the game ball is entered. Further, since the gaming machine is provided with the ball entry state switching means, when the specific control state is entered, the game ball can be inserted by switching to the second ball entry enable state by the ball entry state switching means. A game ball can be inserted into a large winning opening for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, when the second starting ball entry portion is set to the closed state and when the gaming machine has not shifted to the specific control state, the gaming machine switches to the ball entry impossible state by the ball entry state switching means. 2 It is possible to prevent the pachinko ball from entering the starting ball entry section and the large winning opening. Therefore, the gaming machine can guide the gaming ball to different winning openings by switching the entering possible state by the entering state switching means, so that the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature K5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature K3 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine
Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.
A game state transition means (opening / closing execution mode) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means (open / close execution mode). Main controller 60) and
It is provided with a variable winning device (variable winning device 5C) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered.
The variable winning device is
A small prize ball winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening that executes a predetermined number of winning balls when entering a game ball, and
A multi-prize ball winning opening (second winning opening 52) as the second winning opening, which pays out more prize balls than the small prize ball winning opening when the game ball is entered,
The game ball is held by effectively setting the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, the ball-inability state, the first derivative, and the second derivative. The ball entering state switching means for switching between the holding state and the holding state is provided.
When the gaming state transition means shifts to the specific control state, after switching to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means, the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state is possible. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a state and switching to the non-ball entry state by the ball entry state switching means when the state has not been shifted to the specific control state.

According to the feature K5 of the present invention group, the variable winning device includes the ball-entry state switching means. Therefore, when the specific control state is entered, the variable winning device is switched to the hold state by the ball-entry state switching means. By switching to the first playable state, the game ball can be put into the small prize ball winning opening that executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and the game ball is switched to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means. After that, by switching to the second entry-capable state, it is possible to insert the game ball into the multi-prize ball winning opening that executes the payout of a larger number of prize balls than the small prize ball winning opening. In addition, when the variable winning device has not shifted to the specific control state, the variable winning device switches the ball to the non-entry state by the ball entry state switching means, so that the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the number of winning balls can be changed by switching the winning state after switching to the holding state by the ball entering state switching means and then switching the ball winning state. , The player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball held by the ball entry state switching means, and the player can improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature K6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature K5 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state by the ball-entry state switching means, and then again the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state. The game (round game) in the specific control state is defined as one game (round game) until the ball is switched to the ball-entry state, and when the game shifts to the specific control state, the ball-entry state is executed every time the game in the specific control state is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that after switching to the holding state by a switching means, the gaming machine is switched to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state.

According to the feature K6 of the present invention group, when the game state transition means shifts to the specific control state, the gaming state transition means is switched to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means every time the game of the specific control state is executed. Since the player switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball held by the ball-entry state switching means every time the game in the specific control state is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature K7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature K6 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means
A ball-fillable state selection unit (round prize ball determination process) that selects either the first ball-fillable state or the second ball-fillable state, and
When the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching means switches to the first ball-entry state and the ball-entry state selection unit is used. When the second ball-entry state is selected in the above game, the game is provided with a ball-entry state switching unit for switching to the second ball-entry state by the ball-entry state switching means. Machine.

According to the feature K7 of the present invention group, when the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the game state transition means is the first ball-entry state switching means. When the ball is switched to the possible state and the second ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching unit is used to switch to the second ball-entry state switching unit. Since the player is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-entry-possible state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry-possible state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature K8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature K7 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. ..

According to the feature K8 of the present invention group, the ball-entry state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-entry state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to such a feature K group of the present invention, the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved. The problem can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a certain path from the vertically upper side to the vertically lower side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine) including a launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board and a ball entering means for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 10) And
The ball entry means
A first winning opening (first winning opening 51, 51D) provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction, and
It is provided with a second winning opening (second winning opening 52, 52D) provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The gaming machine
A first winning state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening and a game ball is not inserted into the second winning opening, and a game ball is inserted into the second winning opening. At the same time, the second winning state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the first winning opening, and the inability to enter the game ball in either the first winning opening or the second winning opening. The state is switched, and a ball-entry state switching means provided between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is provided.
The ball entry state switching means
A switching derivative (moving bridge body 551 and rotating bridge 541) composed of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening and the second winning opening.
A switching derivative driving unit (bridge driving unit 553, rotating driving unit 543, and advancing / retreating driving unit 544) that integrally drives the switching derivative is provided.
By driving the switching derivative, the switching derivative driving unit inserts the game ball into the first winning opening or the second winning opening. A gaming machine characterized in that the ball is switched to the second ball-entry state.

According to the feature L1 of the present invention group, the switching derivative driving unit is in a first winning state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening by driving the switching derivative, or a second winning opening. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the switching derivative is composed of at least one member that guides the game ball to either the first winning opening or the second winning opening, the switching derivative driving unit is in the first winning state and the second winning opening. In the ball-entry state, the game ball is not guided to both the first winning opening and the second winning opening.

Further, since the first winning opening is provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction and the second winning opening is provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction, the ball entry state switching means. Will be placed in the first winning opening or the second winning opening by distributing the game ball in the horizontal and horizontal directions. Therefore, in order to switch between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, and the ball-inability state, the ball-entry state switching means is used as compared with the case where a mechanism such as an opening / closing door is adopted. , It can be installed by effectively using the space of the game area.

Feature L2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L1 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
The switching derivative driving unit (bridge driving unit 553) for moving the switching derivative (moving bridge main body 551) along the horizontal direction is provided.
The switching derivative is
A first guide surface (first guide surface 551a) that is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side, and
It is provided with a second guide surface (second guide surface 551b) that is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
The switching derivative driving unit moves the switching derivative to the first winning opening side, so that the gaming ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the first guide surface. By switching to the ball-entry state and moving the switching derivative to the second winning opening side, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized in that the switching derivative is switched to the ball-entryable state and the switching derivative is moved to the center of the first winning opening and the second winning opening to switch to the ball-impossible state.

According to the feature L2 of the present invention group, the first guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side, so that the switching derivative driving unit is the switching derivative toward the first winning opening side. By moving the ball, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the first guide surface. Since the second guide surface is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side, the switching derivative driving unit moves the switching derivative to the second winning opening side to guide the second guide. It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening through the surface. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching derivative drive unit is switched to the center of the first winning opening and the second winning opening. By moving the derivative, it is possible to switch to the impassable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature L3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L2 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
A first guide plate (first guide plate 554) as the switching derivative that guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, and
A second guide plate (second guide plate 555) as the switching derivative that guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface is provided.
The switching derivative driving unit projects the first guide plate with respect to the game board and immerses the second guide plate with respect to the game board, thereby causing the first guide plate and the game board to be immersed. The game ball is inserted into the first winning opening through the first guide surface, and the game ball is switched to the first ball-entry state, the second guide plate is projected from the game board, and the game board is projected. By immersing the first guide plate in the game board, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized in that the first guide plate and the second guide plate are immersed in the gaming board to switch to the non-entering state.

According to the feature L3 of the present invention group, since the first guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, the switching derivative driving unit is the first guide plate. By projecting the game ball with respect to the game board, it is possible to switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening through the first guide plate and the first guide surface. Since the second guide plate guides the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface, the switching derivative drive unit causes the second guide plate to protrude from the game board. , It is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching derivative driving unit uses the first guide plate and the second guide plate as the game board. By immersing it in the ball, it is possible to switch to a state in which the ball cannot enter. Therefore, the ball entry state switching means can guide the game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface via the first guide plate in the first ball entry enable state. In the second ball-entry state, the game ball falling toward the first guide surface can be guided to the second guide surface via the second guide plate.

Feature L4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L1 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
A switching derivative driving unit (rotating drive unit 543) for rotating the switching derivative (rotating bridge 541) is provided.
The switching derivative is
The first rotating state (left rotating state) in which the game ball is guided to the first winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the first winning opening side.
It is provided with a second rotating state (right rotating state) in which the game ball is guided to the second winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
By setting the switching derivative to the first rotating state, the switching derivative driving unit can enter the game ball into the first winning opening via the switching derivative. By switching to the state and setting the switching derivative to the second rotating state, the switching derivative is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the switching derivative. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature L4 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the switching derivative is inclined so as to descend toward the first winning opening side and guides the game ball to the first winning opening. By setting the switching derivative to the first rotating state, the switching derivative driving unit can switch to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the switching derivative. it can. In the second rotating state, the switching derivative is inclined so as to descend toward the second winning opening side and guides the game ball to the second winning opening. Therefore, the switching derivative driving unit uses the switching derivative. By setting to the second rotating state, it is possible to switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the switching derivative. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the movement of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature L5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L4 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching means
The switching derivative (rotating bridge 541) provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board, and
The switching derivative driving unit (rotating drive unit 543 and advancing / retreating) that rotates the switching derivative after the switching derivative is recessed with respect to the game board and the switching derivative is projected from the game board. Equipped with a drive unit 544)
The switching derivative is
A first rotating state (left-handed rotating state) that guides the game ball to the first winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the first winning opening side after projecting with respect to the game board. )When,
A second rotation state (right rotation state) that guides the game ball to the second winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the second winning opening side after projecting with respect to the game board. ) And
The switching derivative driving unit projects the switching derivative with respect to the gaming board, and then sets the switching derivative in the first rotating state, whereby the first prize is won through the switching derivative. By switching to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the mouth, projecting the switching derivative with respect to the game board, and then setting the switching derivative in the second rotating state. , The game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the switching derivative. By switching to the second ball-entry state and immersing the switching derivative in the game board, the ball cannot be entered. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a state.

According to the feature L5 of the present invention group, in the first rotating state, the switching derivative protrudes from the game board and then tilts so as to descend toward the first winning opening side. Since the game ball is guided to the winning opening of, the switching derivative driving unit sets the switching derivative to the first rotating state, so that the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the switching derivative. It is possible to switch to the state where the ball can be entered. In the second rotating state, the switching derivative projects from the game board and then inclines so as to descend toward the second winning opening side to guide the game ball to the second winning opening. By setting the switching derivative to the second rotating state, the switching derivative driving unit can switch to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the switching derivative. .. Further, since the first winning opening and the second winning opening are provided so as to open in the horizontal direction, the switching derivative driving unit enters the ball by immersing the switching derivative in the game board. You can switch to the disabled state. Therefore, the switching derivative driving unit can prevent the flow path of the game ball from being obstructed when the ball is switched to the non-entry state.

Feature L6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L4 of the present invention group,
The switching derivative driving unit switches the switching derivative to the non-entry state by rotating the switching derivative so as not to allow the gaming ball to enter either the first winning opening or the second winning opening. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature L6 of the present invention group, the switching derivative driving unit rotates the switching derivative so as not to allow the game ball to enter either the first winning opening or the second winning opening. You can switch to the disabled state. Therefore, the switching derivative driving unit can switch the switching derivative to the non-entry state without adding a new structure.

Feature L7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features L1 to L6 of the present invention group.
The gaming machine
Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.
A game state transition means (opening / closing execution mode) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means (open / close execution mode). Main controller 60) and
It is provided with a variable winning device (variable winning device 5) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered.
The variable winning device is
A small prize ball winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening that executes a predetermined number of winning balls when entering a game ball, and
A multi-prize ball winning opening (second winning opening 52) as the second winning opening, which pays out more prize balls than the small prize ball winning opening when the game ball is entered,
The ball entry state switching means is provided.
When the gaming state transition means shifts to the specific control state, the ball entry state switching means switches to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state, and the specific control state A gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry state switching means switches to the ball-incapable state when the player has not shifted to.

According to the feature L7 of the present invention group, since the variable winning device includes the ball-entry state switching means, when the specific control state is entered, the first ball-entry state can be entered by the ball-entry state switching means. By switching to, it is possible to insert a game ball into the small prize ball winning opening that executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and by switching to the second ball-entry state by the ball entry state switching means, A game ball can be inserted into a multi-prize ball winning opening that pays out more prize balls than a small prize ball winning opening. In addition, when the variable winning device has not shifted to the specific control state, the variable winning device switches the ball to the non-entry state by the ball entry state switching means, so that the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the number of winning balls can be changed by switching the ball-entry state switching means by the ball-entry state switching means. The degree of attention can be improved.

Feature L8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L7 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means
A ball-fillable state selection unit (prize ball determination process) for selecting either the first ball-fillable state or the second ball-fillable state, and
When the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching means switches to the first ball-entry state and the ball-entry state selection unit is used. When the second ball-entry state is selected in the above, the ball-entry state switching unit (large winning opening opening process) for switching to the second ball-entry state by the ball-entry state switching means is used. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

According to the feature L8 of the present invention group, when the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the game state transition means is the first ball-entry state switching means. When the ball is switched to the possible state and the second ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching unit is used to switch to the second ball-entry state switching unit. Since the player is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-entry-possible state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry-possible state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature L9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L8 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. ..

According to the feature L9 of the present invention group, the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-entry state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature L10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features L1 to L6 of the present invention group.
The gaming machine
Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game shifts the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode) which is advantageous for the player. State transition means (main controller 60) and
It is provided with a variable winning device (variable winning device 5A) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered.
The normal control state is
The first gaming state (low probability mode) and
A second gaming state (high probability mode) different from the first gaming state is provided.
The variable winning device is
A normal winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening that executes a predetermined number of winning balls when entering a game ball, and
A specific winning opening (second winning opening 52A) as the second winning opening that sets the normal control state to the second gaming state when the game ball is entered, and
The ball entry state switching means is provided.
When the gaming state transition means shifts to the specific control state, the ball entry state switching means switches to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state, and the specific control state A gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry state switching means switches to the ball-incapable state when the player has not shifted to.

According to the feature L10 of the present invention group, since the variable winning device includes the ball-entry state switching means, when the specific control state is entered, the first ball-entry state can be entered by the ball-entry state switching means. By switching to, the game ball can be put into the normal winning opening that executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and by switching to the second winning state by the ball-entry state switching means, the normal control A game ball can be inserted into a specific winning opening whose state is set to the second game state. In addition, the variable winning device does not allow the game ball to enter the normal winning opening and the specific winning opening by switching to the non-entry state by the ball entry state switching means when the specific control state has not been entered. Can be. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the normal control state can be set to the second gaming state by switching the ball-entry possible state by the ball-entry state switching means. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature L11.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L10 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means, it is determined whether or not the entry state switching means switches to the second entry possible state. The ball entry status determination section (large winning opening opening process) and
When the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening in the specific control state, the normal control state is set to the first gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific winning opening, the above-mentioned A gaming machine including a gaming state setting unit (transition process at the end of open / close execution mode) that sets a normal control state to the second gaming state.

According to the feature L11 of the present invention group, the game state transition means is the second ball entry state switching means based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Since it is provided with a ball entry state determination unit that determines whether or not to switch to the ball entry ready state, the player pays attention to the determination result of the ball entry state determination unit, and the second ball entry enable state. You would expect it to be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature L12.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L10 or the feature L11 of the present invention group
The ball-entry state switching means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second ball-entry state is switched to the first ball-entry state when the game ball enters the specific winning opening.

According to the feature L12 of the present invention group, the ball-entry state switching means switches the second ball-possible state to the first ball-possible state when the game ball enters the specific winning opening. A person can insert a game ball into a specific winning opening and then insert a game ball into a normal winning opening. Then, the normal winning opening can execute a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls are entered. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature L13.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features L4 to L6 of the present invention group.
The gaming machine
Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.
A game state transition means (opening / closing execution mode) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means (open / close execution mode). Main controller 60) and
It is provided with a variable winning device (variable winning device 5C) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered.
The variable winning device is
A small prize ball winning opening (first winning opening 51) as the first winning opening that executes a predetermined number of winning balls when entering a game ball, and
A multi-prize ball winning opening (second winning opening 52) as the second winning opening, which pays out more prize balls than the small prize ball winning opening when the game ball is entered,
Before switching between the first ball-entry state, the second ball-entry state, the ball-impossible state, and the hold state in which the game ball is held by setting the switching derivative to the horizontal state. Equipped with an entry ball state switching means
When the gaming state transition means shifts to the specific control state, after switching to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means, the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state is possible. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a state and switching to the non-ball entry state by the ball entry state switching means when the state has not been shifted to the specific control state.

According to the feature L13 of the present invention group, the variable winning device is provided with the ball-entry state switching means. Therefore, when the specific control state is entered, the variable winning device is switched to the hold state by the ball-entry state switching means. By switching to the first playable state, the game ball can be put into the small prize ball winning opening that executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls, and the game ball is switched to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means. After that, by switching to the second entry-capable state, it is possible to insert the game ball into the multi-prize ball winning opening that executes the payout of a larger number of prize balls than the small prize ball winning opening. In addition, when the variable winning device has not shifted to the specific control state, the variable winning device switches the ball to the non-entry state by the ball entry state switching means, so that the game ball is inserted into the small prize ball winning opening and the multi-prize ball winning opening. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering. Therefore, when the variable winning device shifts to the specific control state, the number of winning balls can be changed by switching the winning state after switching to the holding state by the ball entering state switching means and then switching the ball winning state. , The player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball held by the ball entry state switching means, and the player can improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature L14.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L13 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state by the ball-entry state switching means, and then again the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state. The game (round game) in the specific control state is defined as one game (round game) until the ball is switched to the ball-entry state, and when the game shifts to the specific control state, the ball-entry state is executed every time the game in the specific control state is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that after switching to the holding state by a switching means, the gaming machine is switched to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state.

According to the feature L14 of the present invention group, when the game state transition means shifts to the specific control state, the gaming state transition means is switched to the hold state by the ball entry state switching means every time the game of the specific control state is executed. Since the player switches to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball held by the ball-entry state switching means every time the game in the specific control state is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature L15.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L14 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means
A ball-fillable state selection unit (round prize ball determination process) that selects either the first ball-fillable state or the second ball-fillable state, and
When the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching means switches to the first ball-entry state and the ball-entry state selection unit is used. When the second ball-entry state is selected in the above, the ball-entry state switching unit (bridge rotation process) for switching to the second ball-entry state is provided by the ball-entry state switching means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature L15 of the present invention group, when the first ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the game state transition means is the first ball-entry state switching means. When the ball is switched to the possible state and the second ball-entry state is selected by the ball-entry state selection unit, the ball-entry state switching unit is used to switch to the second ball-entry state switching unit. Since the player is provided, the player pays attention to the selection result of the ball-entry-possible state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry-possible state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature L16.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L15 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. ..

According to the feature L16 of the present invention group, the ball-entry-possible state selection unit executes a lottery to select either the first ball-possible state or the second ball-possible state based on a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the ball-entry state selection unit, and expects to be in the second ball-entry state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to such a feature L group of the present invention, the movement of the game ball flowing down the game area can be diversified, and the player's attention to the game can be improved. The problem can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device follow a certain path from the vertically upper side to the vertically lower side, and the movement of the game ball becomes monotonous. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 36 ... Upper operating port, 37 ... Lower operating port, 5-5G ... Variable winning device, 39 ... Out port, 47 ... Design display device, 60 ... Main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... Voice emission Control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... Display control device, 102 ... MPU.

Claims (8)

A gaming machine including a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on the front surface of a gaming board and a ball entering means for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area.
The ball entry means
The first winning opening provided so as to open on one side in the horizontal direction,
It is provided with a second winning opening provided so as to open on the other side in the horizontal direction.
The gaming machine
A first winning state in which a game ball is inserted into the first winning opening and a game ball is not inserted into the second winning opening, and a game ball is inserted into the second winning opening. At the same time, the second winning state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the first winning opening, and the inability to enter the game ball in either the first winning opening or the second winning opening. The state is switched, and a ball-entry state switching means provided between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is provided.
The ball entry state switching means
A switching derivative composed of at least one member that guides a game ball to either the first winning opening and the second winning opening, and
A switching derivative driving unit for integrally driving the switching derivative is provided.
By driving the switching derivative, the switching derivative driving unit inserts the game ball into the first winning opening or the second winning opening. A gaming machine characterized in that the ball is switched to the second ball-entry state. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The ball entry state switching means
The switching derivative driving unit for moving the switching derivative along the horizontal direction is provided.
The switching derivative is
A first guide surface that inclines so as to descend toward the first winning opening side,
It is provided with a second guide surface that inclines so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
The switching derivative driving unit moves the switching derivative to the first winning opening side, so that the gaming ball is inserted into the first winning opening via the first guide surface. By switching to the ball-entry state and moving the switching derivative to the second winning opening side, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized in that the switching derivative is switched to the ball-entryable state and the switching derivative is moved to the center of the first winning opening and the second winning opening to switch to the ball-impossible state. In the gaming machine according to claim 2.
The ball entry state switching means
A first guide plate as the switching derivative that guides a game ball falling toward the second guide surface to the first guide surface, and
A second guide plate as the switching derivative for guiding the game ball falling toward the first guide surface to the second guide surface is provided.
The switching derivative driving unit projects the first guide plate with respect to the game board and immerses the second guide plate with respect to the game board, thereby causing the first guide plate and the game board to be immersed. The game ball is inserted into the first winning opening through the first guide surface, and the game ball is switched to the first ball-entry state, the second guide plate is projected from the game board, and the game board is projected. By immersing the first guide plate in the game board, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the second guide plate and the second guide surface. A gaming machine characterized in that the first guide plate and the second guide plate are immersed in the gaming board to switch to the non-entering state. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The ball entry state switching means
A switching derivative driving unit for rotating the switching derivative is provided.
The switching derivative is
A first rotating state in which the game ball is guided to the first winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the first winning opening side.
It is provided with a second rotating state in which the game ball is guided to the second winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
By setting the switching derivative to the first rotating state, the switching derivative driving unit can enter the game ball into the first winning opening via the switching derivative. By switching to the state and setting the switching derivative to the second rotating state, the switching derivative is switched to the second ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the switching derivative. A gaming machine characterized by that. In the gaming machine according to claim 4,
The ball entry state switching means
With the switching derivative provided so as to be retractable with respect to the game board,
It is provided with the switching derivative driving unit for rotating the switching derivative after projecting the switching derivative with respect to the game board while projecting the switching derivative with respect to the game board.
The switching derivative is
After projecting with respect to the game board, a first rotating state in which the game ball is guided to the first winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the first winning opening side.
After projecting with respect to the game board, it is provided with a second rotating state in which the game ball is guided to the second winning opening by inclining so as to descend toward the second winning opening side.
The switching derivative driving unit projects the switching derivative with respect to the gaming board, and then sets the switching derivative in the first rotating state, whereby the first prize is won through the switching derivative. By switching to the first ball-entry state in which the game ball is inserted into the mouth, projecting the switching derivative with respect to the game board, and then setting the switching derivative in the second rotating state. , The game ball is inserted into the second winning opening via the switching derivative. By switching to the second ball-entry state and immersing the switching derivative in the game board, the ball cannot be entered. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a state. In the gaming machine according to claim 4,
The switching derivative driving unit switches the switching derivative to the non-entry state by rotating the switching derivative so as not to allow the gaming ball to enter either the first winning opening or the second winning opening. A gaming machine featuring. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
The gaming machine
A starting ball entry means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player, and the game state transition means.
It is provided with a variable winning device that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when the specific control state is entered.
The variable winning device is
When a game ball is entered, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a small prize ball winning opening as the first winning opening is used.
A multi-prize ball winning opening as the second winning opening that pays out more prize balls than the small prize ball winning opening when entering a game ball, and a multi-prize ball winning opening as the second winning opening.
The ball entry state switching means is provided.
When the gaming state transition means shifts to the specific control state, the ball entry state switching means switches to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state, and the specific control state A gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry state switching means switches to the ball-incapable state when the player has not shifted to. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
The gaming machine
A starting ball entry means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state advantageous to the player, and the game state transition means.
It is provided with a variable winning device that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when the specific control state is entered.
The normal control state is
The first game state and
A second gaming state different from the first gaming state is provided.
The variable winning device is
A normal winning opening as the first winning opening for paying out a predetermined number of winning balls when entering a game ball, and a normal winning opening as the first winning opening.
A specific winning opening as the second winning opening that sets the normal control state to the second gaming state when the game ball is entered, and
The ball entry state switching means is provided.
When the gaming state transition means shifts to the specific control state, the ball entry state switching means switches to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state, and the specific control state A gaming machine characterized in that the ball-entry state switching means switches to the ball-incapable state when the player has not shifted to.

Images